JP6803127B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, a game board formed of plywood or the like, a game area formed on the front surface of the game board and into which a game ball is driven, and a plurality of winning openings provided in the game area are provided, and among these plurality of winning openings. There is a method in which a lottery is performed based on whether or not a game ball wins a prize at the starting port, and a symbol is displayed in a variable manner on a display device to stop and display the symbol in a manner according to the lottery result. In addition, when the lottery result of whether or not to make a big hit is a big hit, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the display device, and a big hit game state is generated so that a prize ball can be won.

In such a game machine, a cell sheet having a predetermined design is attached to the front side of the veneer plate to bring out a world view peculiar to the game machine (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-083039

Further, in the conventional game machine, a game ball with a wire rod is launched, and the deterrent force against an illegal game in which the wire rod is operated is not sufficient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having enhanced deterrence against illegal games .

The present invention
It is a game machine equipped with an upper plate and a lower plate that can store game balls.
The game area where the game ball flows down and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball from a predetermined launch position toward the game area,
A return route in which a game ball that has been launched from the launch position but has not reached the game area has an entrance where the ball can enter, and the game ball that has entered the entrance is returned to the lower plate instead of the upper plate. The lower plate return section that makes up the
A fraud prevention unit that can prevent the wire rod attached to the game ball from being operated from the lower plate side through the return route and the exit of the lower plate return unit.
With
The fraud prevention portion is made of a metal plate material having a cut portion formed by bending, and the metal plate material has a predetermined opening other than the entrance so that the cut portion is located at a predetermined position in the return path. It can be attached from the outside of the lower plate return part via
By arranging the metal plate material in the lower plate return portion so that the wire rod can be cut at the cutting portion when tension is applied to the wire rod located in the return path, the wire rod attached to the game ball can be made. It is possible to prevent the operation from the lower plate side through the return route and the outlet of the lower plate return unit.
Further, the return route has a bent portion before the game ball is returned from the outlet of the lower plate return portion, and the wire rod located in the return route can be bent by the bent portion. And.
In addition, it is a game machine equipped with a predetermined return plate.
The game area where the game ball flows down and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball from a predetermined launch position toward the game area,
A return unit that has an entrance through which game balls that have been launched from the launch position but have not reached the game area can enter, and that constitute a return route for returning the game balls that have entered the entrance to the return plate. When,
A fraud prevention unit that can prevent the wire rod attached to the game ball from being operated from the return plate side through the return route and the exit of the return unit.
With
The fraud prevention portion is made of a metal plate material having a cut portion formed by bending, and the metal plate material has a predetermined opening other than the entrance so that the cut portion is located at a predetermined position in the return path. It can be attached from the outside of the return part via
By arranging the metal plate in the return portion so that the wire can be cut at the cutting portion when tension is applied to the wire located in the return path, the wire attached to the game ball is returned. It is possible to prevent the operation from the return plate side through the route and the exit of the return unit.
Further, the return route has a bent portion until the game ball is returned from the exit of the return portion, and the wire rod located in the return route can be bent by the bent portion.
It is characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an enhanced deterrent against illegal gaming .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It shows another form, and is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 36B (a). FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 37A including a partially enlarged view. It is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view which shows another form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line invalidating member, and (b) is a sectional plan view of the foul cover unit. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the main part of FIG. 37G showing the normal flow of the game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. .. It is a top view of the foul cover unit. It is a top view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 37K, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the foul ball passes. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A) and (b) show the state in which the operation line invalidation member is electrified, and are enlarged views corresponding to the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing the state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the main part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit for each main structure and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is an enlarged view of the V winning device. It is an enlarged view of the start port unit, (A) front view, (B) sectional view, (C) sectional perspective view. It is an enlarged view of the start port unit, (A) front view, (B) sectional view, (C) sectional perspective view. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. (A) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flowchart showing the procedure for the interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the pre-determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passage processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit determination process executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used for lottery processing for hits, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big hit types, and (C) is a small hit type. It is a small hit symbol determination table used for the lottery process of. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop symbol setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd variation pattern setting process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit start processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a time chart showing the opening pattern A of the second big winning opening, and (B) is a time chart showing the opening pattern B of the second big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit middle processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol process processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a normal figure hit determination table used for the lottery process for the normal figure hit, and (B) is a normal figure hit open pattern table used for the determination process for the open pattern at the time of hitting the normal figure. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol variation processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop processing executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a time chart showing the opening pattern A of the second starting port, and (B) is a time chart showing the opening pattern B of the second starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary electric accessory opening process executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub-main processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady-state processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot effect processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect symbol normal processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. (A) is an effect hit determination table used for the lottery process for the effect hit, and (B) is an effect symbol variation pattern table in which the variation time of the effect symbol is set as the variation pattern of the effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect symbol variation pattern determination process executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect symbol variation processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect symbol stop processing executed by the peripheral control MPU. This is an example of the effect display of the sub effect display device during the big hit game. This is an example of the effect display of the main effect display device in the time saving state.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position as viewed from the front right. is there. Further, FIGS. 10A and 10B are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from behind by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which the game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in the front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which the game ball B is played by the operation of the player, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder. On the rear side of the main control unit (not shown) having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the game panel 1100. A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged, a main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a main effect display device 1600 in the game area 5a. Sub-effect display device 1700, which is arranged below the above and can display a predetermined effect image, and various winning openings 2001a to 2001a to e, 2002,2004,2005a to b, 2006a to b, and gates attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100. 2003, 2007, upper center accessory 2500, lower center accessory 2600, side lamps 1801, 1802 capable of producing light emission according to the game state, and a back unit attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). And have.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, the game balls B are the general winning openings 2001a to 2001a to granting (payout of a predetermined number of game balls B), the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning openings 2005a and b. A dummy gate 2007 that does not give a predetermined privilege (variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402) to the player even if it passes, and a dummy gate 2007 that is always closed and does not accept the game ball B. It is provided with dummy general winning openings 2006a and b. Obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100. The left middle general winning opening 2001b includes movable pieces 2001b1 and 2001b2, and can accept the game ball B from above even when the movable pieces 2001b1 and 2001b2 are closed. However, the movable pieces 2001b1 and 2001b2 are always in a closed state without being opened and closed, and the winning ratio is kept constant.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700, or the side lamps 1801, 1802 are displayed according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emitting effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 182 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, which will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 is launched by the ball launcher 540 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the launch ball passage formed by the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are accepted into the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened for balls by the payout device 580 described later according to the received winning openings. Is paid out to the upper plate 201.

If the strength of the game ball that cannot reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, that is, the game ball launched with a weak firing force does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. 10A, FIG. As shown in FIG. 37A, the ball falls into the foul ball drop port 1013 provided between the end (end) of the launch rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, which is returned later. It is received by the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontally extending portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a cavity portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends from the front side of the mounting portion 24a to the left with a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly as viewed from the front by disassembling. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is such that the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent the pinching.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and has a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. It includes a part 44e and.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d, and further intrusion. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates between the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and compressed. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. A flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a, and extending downward from the edge of the front extending portion 51b from the left side to the front side and the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the vehicle rolls to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the battery can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4.
Further, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 with a weak firing force and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202, and at the same time. This is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a square and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And the foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. A glass unit mounting portion 101h, which is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted, is provided.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the upper part of the quadrangle extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. The purpose is to relay the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. At the same time, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a, and the ball feeding member 143 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a (a state of staying in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation paddle 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is pulled toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b, which is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and a shaft portion 147b extending upward. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). The state) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 103) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the ball pulling member 143 or the weight portion 143d which are rotatably supported by the shaft. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c is moved downward with the operation transmission unit. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It can be prevented from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. There is. Here, disabling the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting or pinching (pinching and stopping), entwining (winding), or adhering with hot melt or the like. It means to put it in a state.

The operation line nullification member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. Inclined portions 703 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the portions 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. And have. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidation member 700 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700 in FIG. 35 (a). On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same surface as the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700. As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that expands in a V shape toward the right.

By attaching the operation line invalidation member 700 to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is formed in the ball striking supply port 142a. It will be in a state of communication with.

According to the operation line invalidation member 700, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having almost the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and is projected to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as moving an illegal ball in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the ball launching device 540 plays a game. The operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the fraudulent ball launched (struck) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Then, the narrowed portion of the sheared portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 can be cut like scissors, thereby invalidating the operation line and using an illegal ball. It is possible to deter the fraudulent activity that has occurred.
The first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraudulent activity, the metal plate may be bent into a form different from the above, or the bent operation line nullifying member 700 may be formed. It may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.
When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the standby position (on the partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is of a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). By detecting with a sensor and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145, which is an electric feeding means, it is possible to prevent the firing of an illegal ball itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive the ball feeding.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36A and 36B. 36A (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36A (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 36B (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 36B (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is launched by the ball launching device 540 with a force weaker than a predetermined force (launching force that can reach the game area 5a) (launching force that cannot reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is launched. The purpose is to guide the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside to the lower plate 202, and to guide the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. ..
As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.
The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is possible to communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a that communicates with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 which is open toward the rear on the lower right side of the front view of the penetrating ball passage 150a. It is equipped with a full tank ball receiving port 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and although it is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, the momentum is insufficient. The foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into the foul ball falling port 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and the front view right. The game ball B, which is open toward the front near the lower corner and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the rail ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward, and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball discharge port 150d, and a communication passage 150h connecting the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the rail ball receiving portion 150c. The connecting passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i arranged below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately 1 game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. It consists of a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel with a space of one piece, the start end opens upward to the downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the end portion is a storage passage 150e. It opens downward with respect to.
A series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the connecting passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned. It is a passage, and the return passage portion 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud caused by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and is also provided with the launch rail 544 and the outside. The foul ball drop port 1013 established between the rails 1001 is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as a third fraud prevention means.

The second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, which is enlarged in FIG. 37B. As shown in the figure, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 cover and accommodate the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.
The specific operation line invalidation member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidation member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece portion 701 of FIG. 35. The first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 open the connecting passage 150h in a direction facing the flow direction of the ball. A V-shaped shearing portion 7000v is formed.
In the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37B, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 is the lid member 152 constituting the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is directed toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A tapered guide portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is directed toward the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The width narrows toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side and the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second inclined portion 150 kb having a narrowed tip shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a tapered guide portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, slides into the guide portion 150k in a winding shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the first inclined portion 150ka to become the first. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 by sliding the second inclined portion 150 kb. As a result, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul ball and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In addition, in order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150 ka and the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guide portion 150 k may be formed in a curved shape.

Since the second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is provided by using the space communicating from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is allowed to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L protruding from the lower plate ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or is illegal. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as moving the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.
For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the fraudulent ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate, causing it to flow backward and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). When "A") is performed, when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and heads for the launch position of the launch rail 544, Pulled by it (tension is applied), the operation line L wraps around in a U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally cuts. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated, so that it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the ball is intentionally made into a foul ball to be a ball opening, which is a lower plate ball supply port 211c. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (tension is applied) by the subsequent firing of the illegal ball Q and is operated. L is pressed against the folded-back portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q. It will be possible. It should be noted that FIGS. 37A and 37B are explanatory views assuming a case where a fraudulent act B is performed. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, it becomes a foul ball). Even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means), so this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasure by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of Therefore, when targeting fraudulent activity B, the operation line invalidating member 700, 7000 as the first and second fraud prevention means, and further, the operation line invalidating member 7000H as the third fraud prevention means described later. , 7000S is preferably used in combination as appropriate, and one unit of the first operation line invalidation member 700 and another second operation line invalidation member 7000 or the third operation line invalidation member 7000H, 7000S. It is recommended to install it together with the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line invalidation member 700 and the second operation line invalidation member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside, so that they are inconspicuous. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble of, the fraud countermeasure information is hard to leak. Further, since the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 have a decrease in sharpness and the like affect the crime prevention performance, it is easy to maintain the crime prevention performance if they are replaced together with the door frame 3.

By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v to invalidate the operation line L, but sandwich the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022, and the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled or is difficult to push or pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. It may be invalidated as follows.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 37C and 37D, the operation line nullification member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by the shaded portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 37C, and the metal plates 7011, The first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as a holding portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidation member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, the unit main body 151 is prevented so as to be difficult to touch the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And the lid member 152 covers and accommodates it from the outside.
According to the operation line invalidation member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37D, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When wrapping around the folded part in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded part, and the holding portion of the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022. It is pinched and pinched by 7044 like tweezers.
As a result, the fraudulent ball Q that has flowed back from the lower plate ball supply port 211c due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act A reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the fraudulent ball Q that is intentionally made into a foul ball by the fraudulent act B. Can be suppressed from reaching the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball, and even if it reaches that point, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidation member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of extension of the operation line L cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.
In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tips of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as a holding portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the tip portion of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guidance portion). ), And the sandwiching width portion of both plate surfaces may be the sandwiching portion 7044. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud deterrent effect.

Further, although not shown, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that sandwiches the operation line L is provided with a double-sided tape in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 37D, or is filled with an adhesive having a property of not hardening. The adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion to be immobile.

Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000 for sandwiching the operation line L is changed from the above-mentioned one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. 37E, and this coil spring is replaced with a coil spring. It may be formed by installing so that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and its own central axis are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and is sandwiched.
The coil spring has a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as a tension coil spring and a torsion coil spring, but it is necessary to install the coil spring in a compressed state like a compression coil spring. Compared to this, it is advantageous in terms of installation work.
Further, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. 37E, the coil spring is installed by being curved in a direction in which the coils on the approach side of the operation line L are slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly.
When the operation line nullification member 7000 is formed of the coil spring in this way, it can be manufactured at low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidation member 7000 from the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidation member 7000. Further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in order to deal with this, in the above-described embodiment, the course change portion of the return passage portion 1014 of the foul ball (in the present embodiment, the portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c). A slit 1015 is formed in the cell plate (foreign matter) into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters (see FIG. 37A). As a result, it is possible to prevent further illicit work in which a foreign object is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k. As a countermeasure against illegal work in which a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted as in the slit 1015 described above. Not limited to the one that forms the intake port, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 37A, a configuration in which a protruding obstacle portion 1016 is provided to prevent foreign matter such as a cell plate from colliding with the guide portion 150k. As a result, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operation line L and invalidates the members, but FIGS. 37K, 37L, and 37M As shown in FIGS. 37N and 37P, a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

37K, 37L, and 37M show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). It is oscillatingly attached to the course change portion (corner portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c).

That is, in FIG. 37K, the operation line invalidation member 7000D has a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped invalidating portion 2646 projecting vertically to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion. It has a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the 2645 and the invalidation portion 2646 intersect, and an arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 projecting to the right from the upper edge of the invalidation portion 2646. The support shaft 2649 planted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 37L (a). It can swing to the release posture of b). Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2650 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the invalidating portion 2646 sandwiching the shaft hole 2647, and the ball receiving portion is urged by the balance weight 2650. The ball receiving posture shown in FIG. 37L (a) is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) acts on the ball receiving portion 2645, while the load of one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. When acted, it swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b).
Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersection side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the invalidating member 7000D swings in the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b), the intersection side portion 2651 is fitted into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 37L (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward at the course changing section, the ball is placed on the ball receiving section 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is released to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidation member 7000D released from the foul ball urges the balance weight 2650. It returns to the original ball receiving posture.
In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time, but even in such a case, while the previous foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the latter foul ball is as shown in FIG. 37L (b). It is stopped by the arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is reactivated and then processed continuously. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any problem.

Next, the above-mentioned fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the hit ball supply port 142a) to the foul cover unit 150 provided with the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D. By intentionally firing the illegal ball weakly, it is made into a foul ball and taken out from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball, and further, the operation line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped and the subsequent illegal ball is performed. When the fraudulent ball Q due to (a fraudulent act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a) flows in, the fraudulent ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after the change, the ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37M (b). At this time, the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side portion 2651 of the end edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side, but the intersection side portion 2651 When crossing the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing through the passage naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. 37M (b) and cannot move. (Pinch). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.
If the operation line L is meandered between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 to make it difficult for the operation line L to reverse, it is in a state of being captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hit ball supply port 142a side. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidation member 7000D can be stored and recovered as a evidence ball.

The above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q, but the operation line invalidation member 7000D is operated by an electric drive means as shown in FIG. 37N. May be good.
That is, in the operation line invalidation member 7000D of FIG. 37N, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 as an electric drive means is connected to the portion provided with the balance weight 2650, and the ball detector is connected to the invalidation unit 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and it is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line invalidating member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving unit 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence or absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered to operate the operation line. The nullification member 7000D is adapted to return from the release posture to the ball receiving posture.
When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball are detected by the change of the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives the change. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line nullification member 7000D using its own weight.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646 as described above, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the emission signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the ascending position. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, fraudulent activity can be prevented.

The dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D described above cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the illegal ball Q from entering from the opening side for the ball while the ball receiving portion 2645 is blocking the return passage portion 104, the illegal ball described later will be described. It can also be used as a measure to prevent reverse movement. Therefore, it exhibits a higher fraud prevention function.
In addition to the above configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D is formed with, for example, a shutter plate structure in which the invalidation portion linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate is formed. Is a crossing side that crosses the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the crossing side, and the movable area of the crossing side is set. The illegal ball Q after passing is detected by the ball detector to activate the invalidation unit, so that the operation line L is pinched or cut at the intersection crossing the connecting passage 150h. You may.
Further, the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operation line invalidation member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be surely enhanced.

Further, FIG. 37P is a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, which winds up the operation line L and invalidates it.
That is, the operation line nullification member 7000D is a square ring-shaped nullification portion 2646 mounted in the connecting passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate about a rotation shaft 2656 in a direction orthogonal to the passage. The motor 2657, which is an electric drive means for rotating the invalidation portion 2646, and the horizontal bar crossing the connecting passage 150h of the invalidation portion 2646 are used as the intersection side portion 2651, and are downstream from the movable (rotation) region of the intersection side portion 2651. It is composed of a ball detector 2655 provided in the above, and the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655.
When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the connecting passage 150h and passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. When detected by the vessel 2655, the invalidation unit 2646 idles once, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the ball opening.
On the other hand, when the fraudulent ball Q due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the fraudulent ball Q goes under the invalidation unit 2646. In order to pass through the conversion unit 2646, when the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L winds around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q stops within the connecting passage 150h, there is no risk of it falling into the hands of a fraudulent person.
The ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q, and in such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidation member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

As described above, the description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line nullification member includes the following technical ideas.
"The game area where you play with the game ball and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball,
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage that communicates with the game area from the launch position of the ball launcher.
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting the foul ball drop port opened in the middle of the launch ball passage and the ball opening for discharging the game ball to the outside in front of the machine.
Equipped with fraud prevention means that can prevent the operation of the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from the front of the machine.
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that clamps, cuts, or winds the operation line to invalidate it.
The operation line nullification member includes an intersection side portion of the game ball that crosses the foul ball return passage, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball has passed through the movable area of the intersection side portion to operate the foul ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is designed to cross a return passage, and thus the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the intersection to invalidate the operation line. "

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10A, 10B, 37A, 37I, and 37J, the third fraud prevention means provided at the foul ball drop port 1013 is the end (termination) of the launch rail 544. The operation line invalidation member 7000H provided on the part) and the operation line invalidation member 7000S provided on the end portion (specifically, the resin rail base 1001x) of the outer rail 1001.

The operation line nullification member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is combed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. It is covered with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.
Therefore, as described above, an illegal act such as pushing the illegal ball Q from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the return passage portion 1014 using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause the illegal ball Q to flow backward and send it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the launch rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the launch position, it is pulled by it (tension is applied) and the operation line L becomes the operation line invalidation member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the ball is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. Even when a fraudulent act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is used. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, the operation line invalidating member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wire rods in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10A, 37A and 37I. It's a rush.
According to the operation line invalidation member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively hangs in a state where it reaches the game area 5a and is connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower plate ball supply port which is an opening for a ball. Even if an illegal person is grasping through the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension between the wires of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. Since it gets in between, even if the force of the hand operating the operation line L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is made difficult to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the fraudulent ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, as a result, fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q can be suppressed.

As described above, as the third fraud prevention means, the operation line nullification member 7000H on the launch rail 544 side is effective at the initial stage of fraud A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullification member 7000S on the side exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.
Of course, it is also possible to use either one of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and 7000S alone, and a specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and the operation line invalidation member 7000S is also implemented. The forms may be exchanged with each other, or the same invalidating member may be adopted.
Further, in addition to the case where the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts and attached to the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in the embodiment, for example, the metal plate constituting the launch rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. The chemical member 7000H is integrally formed, or the wire rod is integrally formed on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or the V groove is formed on the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. The shape of the pinching portion 7000Sv may be engraved and the operation line L may be attracted to the depth of the groove of the pinching portion 7000Sv to be pinched.
Furthermore, the operation line invalidation member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line invalidation member 7000 as shown in FIG. 37J, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described with reference to FIGS. 37C and 37D. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 may be provided with a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150 ka and a second inclined portion 150 kb.

As described above, with respect to the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 for invalidating the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and also the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is fouled. Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, of course.
For example, in the above embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. The line nullification member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the connecting passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 37A), is provided on the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 36B (a), or outside the foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a portion where the operation line L abuts on a part of the return passage portion 1014 and bends, such as being provided at the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the launch rail 544, and the operation line L is the weight of the illegal ball Q or the like. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it tries to be stretched straight by receiving a tension due to a pulling force by an illegal person. The operation line invalidation member 7000 of the embodiment is installed at a position where the player cannot touch even if the player inserts a fingertip through the opening for the ball, and this position is the safety aspect of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of the crime prevention aspect that makes it difficult to illegally work on the chemical member 7000 itself.

Further, in the embodiment, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided so as to be offset to one side of the connecting passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided to fill the passage width. The cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the starting end portion of the connecting passage 150h are made into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. It is designed not to touch. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000 uses a well-known folding blade structure or a chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and with the unit main body 151. If the loading port 1019 and the discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in a tokoroten manner so that the old and new can be replaced, the sharpness can always be maintained.
In addition, in FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, reference numeral 1021 is a pinching secant line portion for the operation line L cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L is provided on the pinching secant line portion 1021. It is designed to be able to bite. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the pinching secant line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150 g, so that the certainty of fraud prevention is ensured. Is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown, but there is also a game machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In the case of, the fraudulent act of invading the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached into the game area 5a by using the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port (opening for the ball) to the game area 5a (the above-mentioned fraudulent act A, There is a risk of fraudulent activity similar to B). In the case of such a game machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port to the game area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second such as the above-described embodiment. The fraud prevention means of 2 may be provided. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the deterrent effect of fraudulent activity using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as a second fraud prevention means, but a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may be made into a special shape so as to function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a taper provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A slit-shaped catching portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014 so that the operation line L can be captured in the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the shaped guide portion 150k. The operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q may be sandwiched by the capturing portion which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same fraud deterrent effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidation member 7000, but as a special measure against the above-mentioned fraudulent act A, the figure is shown. In 37G, 37H, and 37K, an illegal ball that prevents the intrusion of the illegal ball Q from the ball opening (prevents the reverse / reverse flow of the illegal ball Q) without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. By providing a reverse movement prevention means, fraud due to the fraudulent ball Q is prevented.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37G, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into the course change part (the part directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c) of the return passage part 1014. Not only that, it can be exemplified that the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the fraudulent ball Q itself to another passage and blocking the movement is provided (first fraudulent ball reversal prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of regurgitating the fraudulent ball Q such as the fraudulent act A described above without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. In addition, a capture valve that can swing only in the direction in which the backflowing illegal ball Q enters the attracting portion 1022 at the inlet portion of the attracting portion 1022 (allowing the invasion into the attracting portion 1022 and from the attracting portion 1022) A one-sided valve that makes it impossible to leave the ball (not shown) may be provided, whereby traces of using the fraudulent ball Q and evidence of cheating can be left.
Further, as shown in FIG. 37H, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the backflow (backflow) of the illegal ball Q. Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of regurgitating the fraudulent ball Q such as the above-mentioned fraudulent act A without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. The operation line nullification member 7000D shown in FIG. 37K is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.
Further, of course, the static operation line invalidation member and the dynamic operation line invalidation member described above may have both of them.

Further, in the above embodiment, an operation line invalidation member different from the first operation line invalidation member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014, but such an operation line invalidation member is provided, for example, a foul ball drop port 1013. It may be provided between the launch position and the launch position, or between the foul ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the area 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position lower than the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and the like. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of the flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and the flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof projects downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the one end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disc-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, in a state where the three groove portions 181c are aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d that project outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is dented in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape, and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 bulges round forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting by the player is detected and the handle 182 or the like of the player is subjected to the static electricity. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before the single-shot button 193 is operated. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and projecting forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For the ring-shaped effect operation ring 330 having the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The entire dish unit 200 bulges forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center on the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes rearward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls), the game ball The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall and is capable of discharging the game ball B. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and opens the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball, is provided.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (a shallow rear is open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission part 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / exit 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes a door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish lower left decorative board 283, and a dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The rear surface of the dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211 when it is attached to the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the lent out game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the lent game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward to the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a ball-extracting taxiway 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball-extracting slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It opens on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball-extracting taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It includes an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end of the spring 243 is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is moved through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached to the entire surface of the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the front lower end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h, which penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and the pair of upper side bulging portions 252a which are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating vertically in the front right corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated rearward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removing lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removing hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removing lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a plate upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the plate upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of this dish is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285, in cooperation with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275, decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. In the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate, a semicircle that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end, and the center at the right end. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 340. It includes an operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is provided. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semi-arc shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the left end of the lower right plate decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled on the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be luminescently decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It includes a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and opens upward.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from below, and the portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably attached around the axis extending vertically to the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is provided with a regulating ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates vertically at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotating base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. A plurality of outer and lower cover mounting portions 336b, which are arranged in a plurality of units, are provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It has 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the operation ring drive motor 342 causes the drive gear 343 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined rotation angle range, thereby reciprocating and vibrating the rotation operation unit 302. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type production, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 340, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 integrally rotates with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 340. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower part. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. The elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362 above the elevating base 364. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 is composed of an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380 to form an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c are provided. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to elevate in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which projects downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom portion 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom portion 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrudes rearward from the bottom 373b and is inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative substrate 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can illuminate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular substrate portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and a tubular portion 378 that extends upward from the inner circumference of the substrate portion 378a. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the raised position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moving upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force equal to the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the clockwise direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302 can be light-emitting and decorated. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to perform the rotation operation. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc protruding forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 has a width in the left-right direction and a depth in the front-rear direction formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and makes it appear that a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415 which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically and the door frame right side base 411 and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a through which the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward are formed.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as an adjacent player to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be looked into, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. It is provided with a door frame top bottom plate 454 that connects to the lower end of the door frame.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. A door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and a door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward becomes smaller in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451 and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating up and down on the outer side of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes are formed in the front and rear at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer surfaces of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer circumference of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, the annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side unit 400 door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 410 door frame right side decorative body having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the lower center decoration body 312b 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302, the outer circumference. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. After the payout unit 560 attached to the rear side and paying out the game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the side and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. , And a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, and the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. The tank rail 555 is located between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It includes a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a in which the shape of the front view is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It is provided with a mounting portion 501c and a game board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the part 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501g and the main frame base 501 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501g. It includes a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i that penetrates back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, and the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extension portion 501j that is rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l and passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 to cover the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded back at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the above is rotatably attached.

The upper hinge body 510 of the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and regulates the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft penetrates the launch base 541 and extends forward, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the launch position at the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while being supplied, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B struck by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch ball passage (see FIG. 37A) of the launch passage portion 1012 composed of the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game area 5a. Driven in.

If the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, as shown in FIG. 37A, between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001. It falls from the rail ball drop port 1013 opened in the above to the rail ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and passes from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b extend to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a projecting into the tank rail 553 and extending in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side, thereby forming the inside of the tank rail 553. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. The payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the upper full tank path unit. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is open to the front, and the front side of the guidance unit base 571 is closed. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guidance unit 570, the shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 in front view is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so that the movable piece member 573 can move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

The ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. A flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is used for the back view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end of the sill.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a is narrowed between the side wall of the payout passage and the side wall of the game ball B at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends from above toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which is in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since it is possible to move to the outside of the inner surface of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facility side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b, so that the pachinko machine can be discharged more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the pulling movable piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the ball pulling movable piece 592, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the main body side guide. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the payout unit 560, and the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the lowering end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball pulling movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93A is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93B is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a is directed forward by the speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it steps backward in a stepped manner. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. In this enclosure 624, since the front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and the speaker unit 620a are extended. Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates in the front-rear direction. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball ejection port 629 that ejects the game ball B that has passed through the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and the ejection ball receiving portion 628 downward.

The ball pulling-out guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball pulling guidance portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and around the axis extending vertically, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

In the state where the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is placed in the general winning openings 2001a to 2001a, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning openings 2005a, b, etc. in the game area 5a. The purpose is to perform a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a are enjoyed so as to be accepted or passed.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails in contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. Further, the game board 5 has a board holder attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game content that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder and is played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 103) for control.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the main effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the main effect display device of the game area 5a. It further includes a sub-effect display device 1700 that is arranged below the 1600 and can display a predetermined effect image, and a back unit that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 are attached to the front surface of the back unit, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700.

The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 on the rear side of the front component 1000. It is equipped with a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) on which the back unit can be attached as well as being attached.

On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of (here, five) general winning openings 2001a to 2001 and a plurality of general winning openings are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at a different position in the game area 5a from 2001a to e, and the game ball B, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a, can pass through. The gate unit 2003 to be detected, the second start port 2004, the second start port 2004, or the first start port 2002, which enables the game ball B to be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate unit 2003. The large winning openings 2005a and b, which enable the acceptance of the game ball B in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004, A frame-shaped upper center accessory 2500 having a main effect display device 1600 in the center and an upper general winning opening 2001a at the upper part, which is mounted slightly upward in the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped lower center accessory 2600, which is attached slightly below the center of the front view and has a sub-effect display device 1700 in the center, is provided.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable only with an open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch of the panel holder are penetrated and the lower portion is formed. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the full tank path unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and includes a main effect display device 1600, a sub effect display device 1700, various winning openings 2001a to e, 2002, 2004, 2005a to b, 2006a to b, and a gate 2003. , 2007, upper center accessory 2500, lower center accessory 2600, side lamps 1801, 1802, back unit, etc. are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and which is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of an opaque veneer plate, and a cell sheet is attached to the front surface thereof. In addition, this cell sheet is printed with a pattern that gives a sense of unity throughout the game area 5a, creating a world view peculiar to the model. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface. The panel plate 1110 may be formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal, or the panel plate 1110 may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate. It may be formed.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and is recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder is provided with a through hole that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside is approximately the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing.

Further, the panel holder includes a notch portion of the panel holder which is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch of the panel holder is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch of the panel holder when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 faces forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder in the game board 5 will be described. The substrate holder is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder has a discharge portion notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder covers the lower part of the back unit attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control board of the main control unit is on the rear surface. A box (not shown) is installed.

When the board holder is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge portion is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008, and the general winning ports 2001a to 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, and the big prize. It is possible to receive all the game balls B discharged downward from the mouths 2005a and b and the back unit, and to be discharged from the discharge portion formed on the bottom surface to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit in the game board 5 will be described. The main control unit is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder. The main control unit houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 103) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board box (not shown) that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder. ) And.

The main control board box has a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box is closed by using one sealing mechanism, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism in order to open the main control board box next time. Yes, it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a start port sensor 3002, 2402, a count sensor 2403a, b, a blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a, and a ball receiving / retreating solenoid via a panel relay board (not shown). It is connected to 2404b, an attacker solenoid 2405a, b, a V winning opening solenoid 2111, a general winning opening sensor 3001a to d, a magnetic sensor 3003, an outlet sensor 4008, and a V winning opening sensor 4007a, b.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 is a status display 1401 composed of two LEDs for displaying the game status, and a normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with 1402 and a normal hold indicator 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port. The first special hold number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to 2002, and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display 1406, which consists of eight LEDs that display the results.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the first special winning opening 2005a when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a round display 1408.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the provided LEDs.

Here, the first special hold number indicator 1405 notifies the player of the number of stored jackpot determinations on the first special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserved stored number) that is held in the unexecuted state. Is what you do. The first reserved memory number is added by "1" when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 2002 arranged on the game board 5, while it is "1" when the first side symbol change is started. It is subtracted. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002 within the period in which the first side symbol change is performed, the first reserved storage number is further added and the predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to "4") is accumulated.

On the other hand, the number of stored jackpot determinations on the second special symbol side (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of second reserved stored) is not reserved. Therefore, if the game ball is accepted in the second starting port 2004 within the period in which the first side symbol change or the second side symbol change is performed, the acquired random number is discarded without adding the second reserved memory number. It is designed to do.

Further, in the normal symbol display 1402, when the determination of whether or not it is a normal hit (normal determination) is performed, the normal symbol variation that fluctuates a plurality of types of ordinary symbols is performed based on the result of the normal determination. This normal symbol variation is the normal hit symbol (normal hit display result), which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal hit after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the normal judgment. By stopping in the form of one of the normal symbol (outlier display result), which is a stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal loss, the player wins or loses the normal symbol (normal loss). You will be able to recognize what you have done. The upper part of the second starting port 2004 of this example is closed by an obstacle nail, and in a closed state in which the blade member 2022a, which will be described later, rises substantially vertically, the obstacle nail and the pair of blade members 2022a play a game ball. While B cannot be accepted, if the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped in the form of a normal hit symbol appearing as a result of the normal symbol variation, the blade member 2022a expands in the left-right direction. It changes to the open open state and can accept the game ball to the second starting port 2004.

In addition, the normal hold indicator 1403 notifies the player of the number of normal determination memories (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of normal figure hold storages) held in the unexecuted state. The normal number of reserved symbols is added by "1" when the game ball is accepted by the gate portion 2003 arranged on the game board 5, while it is subtracted by "1" when the normal symbol change is started. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted by the gate portion 2003 within the period in which the normal symbol is changed, the number of reserved symbols is further added, and the predetermined upper limit (the upper limit of the symbols, in the present embodiment) is added. It is accumulated up to "4").

Further, in the present embodiment, the first-side symbol variation and the second-side symbol variation are not executed at the same time, and a symbol using a special symbol is used when the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004. When the fluctuation (first-side symbol fluctuation or second-side symbol fluctuation) is not executed, the first reserved memory number is "0", and neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is executed. Only the second side symbol change can be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation can be executed at the same time.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 attached to the front surface of the back unit. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 103) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510. (Not shown) and. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 1700, and the like.

[5-7. Display device]
The main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 are arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view, and are attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back unit. The main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 are detachably attached to the front surface at the substantially center of the front wall of the back unit. The main effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped upper center accessory 2500 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. The device 1700 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped lower center accessory 2600 in the state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and the sub-effect display device 1700 is an 11-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight. The main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 are connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image. The main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 may be configured by the dot matrix LEDs to display a predetermined still image or moving image.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. Depending on the lottery result, the main effect display device 1600 plays a variable game in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols included in each of the plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) are variably displayed.

Further, in the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5, the symbol variation for displaying the special symbol is performed. The special symbol is a symbol for notification indicating the result of determination of whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit (big hit determination). Then, in the present embodiment, the variation game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol variation for displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 is started. It is supposed to be executed as one game until the end. Hereinafter, the symbol variation performed by the first special symbol display 1404 may be referred to as "first side symbol variation", and the symbol variation performed by the second special symbol display 1406 may be referred to as "second side symbol variation". Sometimes.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is started, a jackpot determination using any of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Is now selected. Then, when a jackpot determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, control is performed to start symbol variation on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the jackpot determination. This is done (main control board 1310). In the symbol variation started in this way, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol (big hit display result), which is a stop mode of the special symbol capable of recognizing the jackpot, and the small hit symbol Either the small hit symbol (small hit display result), which is a stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the hit, or the missed symbol (miss display result), which is the stop mode of the special symbol that can recognize the miss, appears. By being stopped, the player can recognize whether he has won the big hit, won the small hit, or lost (missed). If the game is stopped in the form of a big hit symbol, a big hit game in which a prize ball can be obtained by the player is given. In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped in the form of appearing, a small hit game in which a prize ball can be obtained by the player is given.

On the other hand, the main effect display device 1600 is composed of a display area larger than each symbol display 1404, 1406, and is included in each of a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) in the display area. Multiple types of decorative symbols (multiple types of numbers) are displayed larger than the special symbols. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol is started on each of the symbol indicators 1404 and 1406, the variable display of the decorative symbol is also started on the main display device 1600 correspondingly.

Then, the main effect display device 1600 displays the display result corresponding to the display result of each symbol display 1404, 1406. More specifically, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, the main effect display device 1600 also has a special symbol combination (the symbols in all rows are displayed). When a fixed stop display is displayed for the same symbol combination, etc., and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, the main effect display device 1600 also makes a big hit. A special symbol combination different from the time (such as a symbol combination in which all the symbols in all rows are the same symbol) is displayed as a fixed stop, and the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 is displayed as a stop. If this is the case, the main effect display device 1600 also displays a fixed stop display of the symbol combination at the time of loss (such as a symbol combination in which the symbols in all rows are not the same symbol). As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the big hit, won the small hit, or lost the game by checking the variable game played on the main effect display device 1600. Will be.

Further, in the main effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped in the order of left column → right column → middle column when viewed from the player side, and specific two rows (left and right in this embodiment). When the same decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of leading the same decorative symbol in the second row), a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left column and the right column are the reach formation columns forming the reach state among the plurality of symbol columns. It becomes.

Here, the "temporary stop display" can appear in the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 during the period in which the special symbol maintains the fluctuating state, and is the main effect display. This is a state in which a specific decorative symbol is displayed in a fluctuating state within the display area of the device 1600. On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" is a display that can appear when or after the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and is the main effect display. It is a state in which any of the decorative symbols is stopped in the display area of the device 1600 without shaking.

On the other hand, the sub-effect display device 1700 does not change the symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol executed by each symbol display 140, 1406, but is determined under specific conditions (in this example, a predetermined value during execution of the jackpot game). When the game ball B is accepted in the lower right general winning opening 2001e (within the period), a promotion effect is performed in which a plurality of types of effect symbols included in each of the plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, when the game ball B is accepted by the lower right general winning opening 2001e during the jackpot game, a production random number is acquired, and the acquired production random number is compared with a judgment table according to the type of jackpot. The effect mode of the promotion effect is determined, and the effect symbols are variedly displayed in the determined effect mode and stopped and displayed at a predetermined symbol combination. In addition, in the case of a big hit that is controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game, a special symbol combination (such as a symbol combination in which all the symbols in all rows are the same symbol) may be stopped and displayed, while the time saving state is controlled after the big hit game. If it is a big hit, the combination of missed symbols (such as a combination of symbols whose symbols in all rows are not the same) is stopped and displayed. As a result, the player confirms the promotion effect executed by the sub-effect display device 1700 when the jackpot game is started, and can determine whether the time-saving state or the non-time-saving state is controlled after the jackpot game. It will be easier to recognize.

As with the main effect display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 1700 also stops the variable display of the effect symbol in the order of left column → right column → middle column when viewed from the player side, and is specific. When the same effect symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in two rows (two rows on the left and right in the present embodiment), a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left column and the right column are the reach formation columns forming the reach state among the plurality of symbol columns. It becomes.

Further, in this example, the sub effect display device 1700 is configured to execute the effect when the big hit game is started, but it is predetermined in relation to the variable display of the decorative symbol executed by the main effect display device 1700. An effect display (such as an effect display that is expected to be a big hit or a small hit) may be executed.

[5-8. Various winning devices]
Various winning devices (general winning openings 2001a to 2001, starting openings 2002 and 2004, gate 2003, and large winning openings 2005a and b) in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 102. Various winning devices are attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

The game board 5 is capable of accepting game balls B driven into the game area 5a, and is open at all times (five here) general winning openings 2001a to 2001, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001a. ~ E are the first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and the first start port 2002, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. The gate portion 2003 to be used, the second starting port 2004 to be able to accept the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the first (Ii) The first special winning opening 2005a, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, which is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting port 2004, and the first (2) The second special winning opening 2005b, which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B into the starting port 2004, and the player even if the game ball B passes through. A dummy gate 2007 that does not give a predetermined privilege (variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402), and a dummy general winning opening 2006a that is always closed and does not accept the game ball B. b and.

A plurality of (five here) general winning openings 2001a to e are arranged in the game area 5a, one in the upper center in the left-right direction, two in the lower left side, and two in the lower right side. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a and above the center in the vertical direction. The second starting port 2004 is arranged below the gate portion 2003. The first large winning opening 2005a is arranged below the first starting port 2002 in the center in the left-right direction, and the second large winning opening 2005b is the first starting at the upper right of the lower right general winning opening 2001e on the right side of the center in the left-right direction. It is arranged at a height between the mouth 2002 and the first prize-winning mouth 2005a.

The second major winning opening 2005b described above changes into an open state in which the game ball B can be accepted by the second attacker solenoid 2405b and a closed state in which the game ball B cannot be accepted. While it is normally closed, the second special lottery result is "small" according to the second special lottery result that is drawn when the second start port sensor 2402 detects the entry of the game ball B. When it is a "hit", it changes from a closed state to an open state.

Further, inside the second major winning opening 2005b, a V winning device 2400 that distributes the game ball B accepted by the second major winning opening 2005b to either one of the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging port 2412 is provided. ing. The V winning device 2400 is one in a rotating body 2410 having a recess 2410a capable of holding only one game ball B received in the second large winning opening 2005b, and one in the recess 2410a of the rotating body 2410. One game ball is held in the V winning opening 2411 that can accept the game ball when the rotating body 2410 rotates clockwise while the game ball is held, and the recessed portion 2410a of the rotating body 2410. Since the rotating body 2410 is rotating clockwise, it is possible to eject the game ball when the game ball is received in the second large winning opening 2005b in a state where the recess 2410a is not located above. It is provided with a discharge port 2412.

Then, when the result of the second special lottery becomes "small hit", the rotating body 2410 is rotated by the V winning opening solenoid 2111 in a manner corresponding to the type of "small hit", and the rotating body is rotated by the V winning opening solenoid 2111. When the game ball B is received by the second large winning opening 2005b in the acceptable state in which the recess 2410a is located above by rotating the 2410 90 ° counterclockwise from the standby state, the game ball B is held in the recess 2410a. On the other hand, the rotating body 2410 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the standby state by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, so that the recessed portion 2410a is in an acceptable state in which it is located above, but the game ball B is already in the recessed portion 2410a. When the rotating body 2410 is not rotated 90 ° counterclockwise by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, the game ball B is accepted by the second major winning opening 2005b in a standby state where the recess 2410a is not located above. If so, the game ball B will be discharged from the discharge port 2412 without being held by the recessed portion 2410a of the rotating body 2410. Then, when the second large winning opening 2005b is returned to the closed state, the rotating body 2410 is also rotated 90 ° clockwise from the acceptable state by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, and the recess 2410a is not located above (horizontally right side). By returning to the standby state (positioned in the facing state), one game ball B held in the recessed portion 2410a of the rotating body 2410 is distributed to the V winning opening 2411.

The V winning opening 2411 is provided with a first V winning opening sensor 4007a and a second V winning opening sensor 4007b as sensors for detecting the passing game ball B. Further, the discharge port 2412 is provided with a discharge port sensor 4008 that detects the passing game ball B. According to this, the game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410 should be detected by both the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. However, when only one of the sensors is detected, it is determined that the game ball B has not entered the V winning opening 2411 to prevent fraudulent acts. Further, the total of the number of game balls detected by the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b and the number of game balls detected by the outlet sensor 4008 is the second count sensor 2403b. It should match the number of game balls detected by, and if these do not match, it is judged that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411, and cheating is prevented. doing.

Further, like the panel plate 1110, a cell sheet is also attached to the front surface of the V winning device 2400, and a part of the inside of the V winning device 2400 (a hollow portion capable of holding the game ball B of the rotating body 2410 and a V). Only a part of the winning opening 2411) is visible. Further, the cell sheet attached to the front surface of the V winning device 2400 has a pattern that is consistent with the pattern drawn on the cell sheet attached to the panel board 1110, and the entire game area 5a is drawn. It has come to bring out a world view peculiar to the model. Further, the unit member (not shown) constituting the second special winning opening 2005b is provided by being fitted into the opening of the game board 5. When the unit member constituting the second large winning opening 2005b is fitted into the opening of the game board 5, the front wall portion (the surface portion to which the cell sheet is attached) of the rotating body 2410, which is a part of the unit member, becomes a game. It is arranged so as to form substantially the same surface as the surface portion of the region 5a. Further, the pattern drawn on the cell sheet attached to the rotating body 2410 has a sense of unity in the entire game area 5a when the recessed portion 2410a of the rotating body 2410 is in the standby state facing the right side in the horizontal direction. When the recessed portion 2410a of the rotating body 2410 changes to an acceptable state located above, the sense of unity of the pattern in the entire game area 5a is broken.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), a part of the character "A" is drawn on the cell sheet attached to the front surface of the rotating body 2410, and the recessed portion 2410a of the rotating body 2410 is drawn. Is in a standby state facing the right side in the horizontal direction, and represents the letter "A" together with the pattern drawn on the cell sheet attached to the front surface of the V winning device 2400. Then, as shown in FIG. 100 (B), when the small hit game is started and the rotating body 2410 changes to an acceptable state in which the recessed portion 2410a is positioned upward, the character "A" is broken.

In this way, the rotating body 2410 is arranged so as to represent the letter "A" together with the pattern drawn on the cell sheet attached to the front surface of the V winning device 2400 in the standby state in which the small hit game is not executed. On the other hand, an acceptable state in which the small hit game is started and is likely to be in an advantageous state for the player, that is, the recessed portion 2410a of the rotating body 2410 is located above and the game ball B is placed in the V winning device 2400. The letter "A" is broken in the acceptable state where it can be distributed to the V winning opening 2411 when it is accepted. As a result, the sense of unity of the pattern in the entire game area 5a is broken, and the player can feel a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the player will be in an advantageous state without performing voice output, light emitting decoration, or the like. It is possible to recognize that it is in an acceptable state.

In this example, the rotating body 2410 represents the letter "A" together with the pattern drawn on the cell sheet attached to the front surface of the V winning device 2400 in the standby state in which the small hit game is not executed. Although it is constructed, not only characters but also patterns such as characters and landscapes may be represented by a cell sheet attached to the front surface of the rotating body 2410 and a cell sheet attached to the front surface of the V winning device 2400. Good. In this case, a part of a pattern such as a character or a landscape may be drawn on the cell sheet attached to the front surface of the rotating body 2410.

Further, when the unit member constituting the second special winning opening 2005b is fitted into the opening of the game board 5, the front wall portion of the rotating body 2410 is arranged so as to form substantially the same surface as the surface portion of the game area 5a. Not limited to things. For example, a movable member as shown in the rotating body 2410 is arranged so as to project forward from the front surface of the game area 5a, or is arranged behind the front surface of the game area 5a, and at least a part of the movable member. A portion that constitutes a composite decoration (integral decoration) may be provided continuously with the front surface of the game area 5a, and the composite decoration may be distorted by the operation of the movable member. Due to the distortion of the three-dimensional composite decoration that continuously continues from the front surface of the game area 5a in this way, information on the game is given to the player (for example, the state is in an acceptable state that is likely to be advantageous to the player). Can be suggested.

The gate unit 2003 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003. Further, the second starting port 2004 includes a second starting port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received by the second starting port 2004. The large winning openings 2005a and b are provided with count sensors 2403a and b that detect the game balls B received in the large winning openings 2005a and b, respectively. Further, the second starting port 2004 is a blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a, which changes the second starting port 2004 into a state in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003. The receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is provided. The large winning openings 2005a and b are the large winning openings 2005a and b according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is equipped with attacker solenoids 2405a and 2405a and b, which are opened and closed respectively.

A pair of blade members 2022a that can be expanded by the blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a are arranged at the second starting port 2004 of this example, and in a closed state in which the pair of blade members 2022a stand up substantially vertically, the second blade member 2022a is arranged. (Ii) The game ball B cannot be accepted due to the obstacle nail planted above the starting port 2004 and the pair of blade members 2022a, whereas the pair of blade members 2022a is in an open state in which the pair of blade members 2022a are expanded in the left-right direction. The game ball B can be accepted. Further, a ball receiving member 2023 capable of advancing and retreating by the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is arranged at the second starting port 2004 of this example, and the game ball B is secondly started in the retracted state retracted to the rear of the game board 4. While it is discharged from below the second starting port 2004 to the game area 5a without being received by the mouth 2004, in the protruding state protruding forward of the game board 4, the game ball B is received by the upper surface thereof and is discharged to the second starting port. It is supposed to be accepted in 2004. Further, the opening / closing operation of the blade member 2022a and the advancing / retreating operation of the ball receiving member 2023 are performed in synchronization with each other. That is, when the blade member 2022a is changed from the closed state to the open state by the blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a, the ball receiving member 2023 is changed from the retracted state to the protruding state by the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b at the same time as this opening / closing operation. When the blade member 2022a is changed from the open state to the closed state by the solenoid 2404a, the ball receiving member 2023 is changed from the protruding state to the retracted state by the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b at the same time as this opening / closing operation. As a result, when the game ball B is accepted when the blade member 2022a is in the open state, the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004 by the ball receiving member 2023 in the protruding state.

101 and 102 show enlarged views of the starting port unit 2100. In this example, the second starting port 2004, the blade member 2022a, the ball receiving member 2023, the blade opening / closing solenoid 2402a, and the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b are unitized, and can be easily attached to and detached from the game board 5. Further, FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a state in which the game ball B cannot be accepted in the second starting port 2004 because the blade member 2022a is in the closed state and the ball receiving member 2023 is in the retracted state, and FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the blade. It is a figure which shows the state which can accept the game ball B in the 2nd start opening 2004 by the member 2022a is open state, and the ball receiving member 2023 is a protruding state.

FIG. 101 (A) is an enlarged view of the start port unit 2100 in a state where the blade member 2022a is in the closed state and the ball receiving member is in the retracted state, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (B) is an enlarged view. FIG. 101 (C) is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit 2100 as viewed from the side, and FIG. 101 (C) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the starting port unit 2100 as viewed from diagonally upward to the right. As shown in FIG. 101 (B), even if the game ball B enters the start port unit 2100 from between the two blade members 2022a in this state, the ball receiving member 2023 is in the retracted state. The game ball B is passed through the upper surface of the ball receiving member 2023 without being received, and is discharged from below the second starting port unit 2100 to the game area 5a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the blade member 2022a is closed, the obstacle nail prevents the game ball from entering the starting port unit 2100, and the blade member 2022a is opened and closed and the ball is opened and closed. Since the advance / retreat operation of the receiving member 2023 is performed in synchronization with the advance / retreat operation, the game ball does not enter the starting port unit 2100 when the blade member 2022a is in the closed state. However, while the blade member 2022a is changing from the open state to the closed state, the game ball may enter the start port unit 2100. However, even in this case, since the ball receiving member 2023 is changed from the protruding state to the retracted state in synchronization with the change from the open state to the closed state of the blade member 2022a, the blade member 2022a is changed from the open state to the closed state. Most of the game balls pushed (entered, guided) into the starting port unit 2100 due to the change to the ball receiving member 2023 pass through without being received by the upper surface of the ball receiving member 2023, and pass through the second starting port unit 2100. It is discharged from below to the game area 5a.

In other words, the closing condition is satisfied (the blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a is turned on to change the blade member 2022a from the closed state to the open state, and the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is turned on to project the ball receiving member 2023 from the retracted state. After the opening condition to change to the state (a predetermined time has passed after the normal hit symbol was won by the normal judgment and the normal hit symbol was stopped on the normal symbol display 1402) was satisfied. That is, the blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a is turned off to change the blade member 2022a from the open state to the closed state, and the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is turned off to change the ball receiving member 2023 from the protruding state to the retracted state. Most of the game balls that have entered the start port unit 2100 during the period are not received by the upper surface of the ball receiving member 2023, but pass through and are discharged from below the second start port unit 2100 to the game area 5a. That is, compared to the game ball that entered the start port unit 2100 during the period from the establishment of the opening condition to the establishment of the closing condition, the game ball that entered the start port unit 2100 after the closing condition was satisfied It is difficult to be accepted in the second starting port 2004.

Further, since the blade member 2022a is configured to prevent the game ball from entering the start port unit 2100 by an obstacle nail when the blade member 2022a is closed, the game ball enters the start port unit 2100 based on the establishment of the opening condition. The ball receiving member 2023 can be changed from the retracted state to the protruding state by turning on the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b in the non-retracted state, and the tip portion 2023a of the ball receiving member 2023 and the back surface of the front cover 2101 of the starting port unit 2100 can be changed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of so-called "ball biting" in which the game ball is pinched.

In this example, a solenoid that opens and closes the blade member 2022a (blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a) and a solenoid that moves the ball receiving member 2023 forward and backward (ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b) are separately provided, but the blade member 2022a and the ball receiving member are separately provided. The member 2023 may be operated in conjunction with one solenoid. In this case, a lock mechanism may be provided to prevent the blade member 2022a from being released unless the opening condition is satisfied, whereby the blade member 2022a is opened even though the opening condition is not satisfied. It is possible to prevent fraudulent entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004. The start port unit 2100 of this example does not have a lock mechanism for preventing the blade member 2022a from being opened unless the opening condition is satisfied. However, since the solenoid (blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a) for opening / closing the blade member 2022a and the solenoid (ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b) for advancing / retreating the ball receiving member 2023 are separately provided and operated individually, the opening condition is satisfied. Even if the blade member 2022a is opened to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 2004, the ball receiving member 2023 retracts without changing to the protruding state in conjunction with the opening of the blade member 2022a. The state is maintained, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004.

It should be noted that the starting port unit may be configured not to be provided with an obstacle nail that prevents the game ball from entering the starting port unit 2100 when the blade member 2022a is closed. In this case, the starting port unit may be provided even when the blade member 2022a is closed. The game ball will enter the 2100. However, the opening / closing operation of the blade member 2022a and the advancing / retreating operation of the ball receiving member 2023 are performed in synchronization with each other, and when the blade member 2022a is in the closed state, the ball receiving member 2023 is in the retracted state. The game ball that has entered the start port unit 2100 when the blade member 2022a is closed passes through without being received by the upper surface of the ball receiving member 2023, and is discharged from below the second start port unit 2100 into the game area 5a. To.

Further, the ball receiving member 2023 is provided so that the tip portion 2023a is further recessed from the entrance of the second starting port 2004 in the retracted state. Further, the upper entrance 2102 of the second starting port 2004 of the starting port unit 2100 is formed so as to project forward. Therefore, even if a rod or the like is inserted between the two blade members 2022a to pull out the ball receiving member 2023, it interferes with the upper end of the front cover 2101 of the start port unit 2100 and the upper end of the entrance of the second start port 2004. The two blades can be prevented from being inserted into the second starting port 2004, and the tip portion 2023a of the ball receiving member 2023 is provided so as to be deeper than the entrance of the second starting port 2004 in the retracted state. It is possible to reliably prevent the rod inserted from between the members 2022a from reaching the ball receiving member 2023. That is, it is possible to prevent fraudulently entering the game ball into the second starting port 2004.

Further, the front cover 2101 provided on the front surface of the starting port unit 2100 is formed so that its back portion is hard to see, which makes it difficult to recognize the existence of the ball receiving member 2023. However, in this example, the ball receiving member 2023 can be visually recognized by staring at the front cover 2101.

In general, the ball receiving member 2023 or the like is movable so as to protrude toward the front side of the game board 5 and change to a state in which the game ball can be accepted, and at the same time, evacuate to the back side and change to a state in which it is difficult to accept the game ball. It is difficult for the player to grasp the operating state of the body. However, in this example, the blade member 2022a is provided so as to be visible to the player and the open / closed state thereof can be easily grasped, and the opening / closing operation of the blade member 2022a and the advancing / retreating operation of the ball receiving member 2023 are performed. If the blade member 2022a is in a closed state where it is difficult to accept the game ball, the ball receiving member 2023 is also in a retracted state where it is difficult to accept the game ball, and the blade member 2022a can easily accept the game ball. Since the ball receiving member 2023 is in a protruding state in which the game ball can be easily received if the ball receiving member 2023 is in the open state, the operating state of the ball receiving member 2023 can be easily determined from the operating state of the blade member 2022a. ..

FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged view of the start port unit 2100 in a state where the blade member 2022a is in the open state and the ball receiving member is in the protruding state, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (B) is an enlarged view. FIG. 102 (C) is a cross-sectional view of the starting port unit 2100 as viewed from the side, and FIG. 102 (C) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the starting port unit 2100 as viewed from diagonally upward to the right. As shown in FIG. 102 (B), when the game ball B enters the start port unit 2100 from between the two blade members 2022a in this state, the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the ball receiving member 2023 which is in a protruding state. It is designed to be accepted. Further, a predetermined range (recessed portion 2023b) from the tip portion 2023a to the rear of the upper surface of the ball receiving member 2023 is gently inclined downward, and the game ball received on the upper surface is received by the second starting port 2004. It is designed to guide you inside.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 102 (B) and 102 (C), the ball receiving member 2023 has a shape in which the tip portion 2023a protrudes upward, and the tip portion 2023a and the second tip portion 2023a protruding upward in the ball receiving member 2023. When the game ball enters the recessed portion 2023b between the entrance of the start port 2004, the game ball is guided into the second start port 2004. Further, in the protruding state of the ball receiving member 2023, the recessed portion 2023b between the tip portion 2023a protruding upward in the ball receiving member 2023 and the entrance of the second starting port 2004 has a width slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. The width of the entrance of the second starting port 2004 (width in the vertical direction and the width in the horizontal direction) is set to be slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball. Therefore, when the ball receiving member 2023 is in a protruding state and the tip portion 2023a is in a state of protruding toward the front (player side), the game ball that has entered the starting port unit 2100 is in the ball receiving member 2023. It enters the recessed portion 2023b between the tip portion 2023a protruding upward and the entrance of the second starting port 2004 and is guided into the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the start port unit 2100 comes into contact with the ball receiving member 2023 that has changed from the protruding state to the retracted state, the game ball protrudes upward in the ball receiving member 2023. The second start when the ball receiving member 2023 rolls on the tip portion 2023a protruding upward in the ball receiving member 2023 without entering the recessed portion 2023b between the 2023a and the entrance of the second starting port 2004, and the ball receiving member 2023 changes to the retracted state. It is discharged from below the mouth unit 2100 into the game area 5a. That is, even if the game ball that has entered the start port unit 2100 comes into contact with the ball receiving member 2023 that has changed from the protruding state to the retracted state, the tip portion 2023a and the second starting port that protrude upward in the ball receiving member 2023. The entrance upper part 2102 of 2004 prevents the entry into the second starting port 2004. The upper surface of the tip portion 2023a has a shape inclined to the back side (rear of the game board), and when the game ball comes into contact with the ball receiving member 2023 which has changed from the protruding state to the retracted state. Even if the game ball is sandwiched between the tip portion 2023a and the entrance upper part 2102, the force for pushing the game ball toward the front side (front of the game board) according to the operation of the ball receiving member 2023 from the protruding state to the retracted state is applied. Since it occurs, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem such as pinching a game ball.

As described above, the start port unit 2100 of this example is operated so as to synchronize the blade member 2022a and the ball receiving member 2023, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and the game ball cannot be accepted. It is designed to switch to a new state. With this configuration, the second starting port 2004 can accept the game ball from the state where it cannot accept the game ball for a short time in the non-time saving state in which it is not desired to generate a prize in the second starting port 2004. It becomes possible to prevent the game ball from being accepted in the second starting port 2004 as much as possible when the game is changed to, and the design of the game specifications and the like becomes easy.

Further, the means for changing the state in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the state in which the game ball cannot be accepted is not limited to the one in which the blade member 2022a and the ball receiving member 2023 are operated in synchronization with each other. , The blade member and the blade member may be operated in synchronization with each other, or the ball receiving member and the ball receiving member may be operated in synchronization with each other.

The upper center accessory 2500 is arranged slightly upward in the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Similarly, the lower center accessory 2600 is arranged slightly below the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Further, the upper center accessory 2500 and the lower center accessory 2600 are formed in a frame shape, and the main effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame of the upper center accessory 2500. The sub-effect display device 1700 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame of the lower center accessory 2600.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped upper center accessory 2500 and lower center accessory 2600 excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is driven into the game area 5a. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

The game balls B received in the general winning openings 2001a to e are sent to the back unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensors 3001a to d, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder. .. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the back unit on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder. ..

Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder. The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005a is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first count sensor 2403a, discharged to the lower substrate holder, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder. After being detected by the second count sensor 2403b, the game ball B received in 2005b is distributed to one of the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging port 2412, and the V winning opening sensors 4007a and b and the discharging port sensor 4008 It is detected on one side, then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and discharged to the lower substrate holder.

[5-9. Side lamp]
The side lamps 1801, 1802 can produce light emission according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is a thing. The side lamps 1801 and 1802 can appropriately emit light from LEDs to produce a light emitting effect, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present a variety of patterns to the player, which makes the player bored. It can be made difficult, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[5-10. Back unit]
The back unit in the game board 5 will be described. The back unit is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 1700, and the peripheral control unit are attached to the front side. The back unit includes general winning opening sensors 3001a to 3001a to detect game balls B received in general winning openings 2001a to e, and first starting port sensors 3002 for detecting game balls B received in first starting opening 2002. And a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 103).

The panel relay board includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a first count sensor 2403a, a second count sensor 2403b, a blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a, and a ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b. With the first attacker solenoid 2405a that opens and closes the first prize opening 2005a, the second attacker solenoid 2405b that opens and closes the second prize opening 2005b, the general winning opening sensors 3001a to d, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003. It is for relaying the connection of.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main effect display device 1600 and a sub effect display device based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the 1700. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, although detailed illustration is omitted. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. Detects the game ball B received in the mouth sensor 2402, the upper general winning opening 2001a and the left middle general winning opening 2001b. Detects the game ball B received in the upper / left middle general winning opening sensor 3001a and the lower left general winning opening 2001c. Lower left general winning opening sensor 3001b, lower right middle general winning opening sensor 3001c for detecting game ball B received in general winning opening 2001d, lower right lower right for detecting game ball B received in general winning opening 2001e General winning opening sensor 3001d, gate sensor 2401 for detecting game ball B passing through gate unit 2003, first count sensor 2403a for detecting game ball B received in first large winning opening 2005a, second large winning opening 2005b Second count sensor 2403b for detecting the game ball B received in the second prize opening sensor 4007a, b for detecting the game ball B accepted in the V winning opening 2411 in the second major winning opening 2005b, second major winning opening Detection signals from the discharge port sensor 4008 that detects the game ball received in the discharge port 2412 in 2005b, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and the like each set the main control I / O port. Entered via.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a, the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b, and the first attacker solenoid 2405a , And the drive signal is output to the second attacker solenoid 2405b, and the status indicator 1401, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal hold indicator 1403, and the first special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to 1404, the first special hold number indicator 1405, the second special symbol indicator 1406, the round indicator 1408, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the game ball B frequently enters the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, the general winning opening sensors 3001a to d, and the count sensors 2403a and b. A non-contact electromagnetic proximity switch with high durability and long life is used because it spheres and passes frequently.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that contains a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it indicates that it is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is provided with a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the peripheral control board 1510 is a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main effect display device based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It includes an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of 1600.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Under the main hold number indicator 1610 that displays the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the side lamps 1801, 1802 and the first start port 2002, or under specific conditions (in this example, within a predetermined period during the execution of the jackpot game). Lighting signal, blinking signal, or blinking signal to the color LED, etc. provided on the sub-holding number indicator 1710, etc., which displays the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the lower right general winning port 2001e. The game board side light emission data for outputting the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5, and the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3 And the door side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., and the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED, etc. provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door side light emission data for output and the door side drive light emission data composed of the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port can be transmitted to the door frame 3 side, or the main effect display device 1600 or the sub effect display device can be used. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the 1700 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, a control signal for extracting sound information from the sound ROM. (Sound command) is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board of the game board 5 are input with a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or is based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, and each drive motor provided on the game board 5. Output to.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a main effect display device 1600, and a sub effect display. A VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the device 1700, an image ROM that stores various screen data displayed on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700, and an image ROM that stores various data on the screen are stored in this image ROM. It is equipped with an image RAM in which various data are transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main effect display device 1600 and The drawing control of the sub-effect display device 1700 is performed. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and corresponding schedule data. A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which screen data drawn on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub-effect display device 1700 according to the progress of schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM. Has been done.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700. Further, when the main effect display device 1600 or the sub effect display device 1700 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line for drawing the left-right direction of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing for one line held in this line buffer is drawn. This is a method of outputting data to the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display display. This will affect the speed of drawing on the device 1700. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit displayed on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700. For example, when displaying various characters on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. For these sprites, the position where they are arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing sprites") are set, and the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device are set. It is drawn at 1700.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in width 2 x height 3 etc. are used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 sequentially perform a main scan that sets a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel from left to right when viewed from the front, and intersects the one direction. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction of movement. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700, the front of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 is used as the main scanning. From the left to the right, the data is output to each line of pixels. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data of the minutes, the main scan is output to the pixels of one line in order from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700.

[7. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side (left hit) or the right side (right hit) of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously driven per minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails. , The flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill that rotates by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

The game ball B that has flowed down to the left or right side of the center accessory 2500 may be moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by an obstacle nail or the like and may be received by the first starting port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball B is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed), the game ball B may be accepted by the second starting port 2004 or may pass through the gate portion 2003. is there.

When the game ball B hit to the right in this way passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal determination is made on the main control board 1310. When the normal symbol is won in this normal judgment and the corresponding selection is shown in the normal symbol variation (opening condition is satisfied), the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 is opened (opened). The blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a is turned on, and the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is turned on so that the ball receiving member 2023 is advanced so as to protrude toward the player (protruding state), and the blade member 2022a in the open state is turned on. The game ball B that has entered from is received by the ball receiving member 2023 and can be received by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

In the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a predetermined time has elapsed since the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 was operated in the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 was operated in the protruding state (closing condition). The blade opening / closing solenoid 2404a is turned off so as to close (close) the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100, and the ball receiving member 2023 is retracted in the game board 5 based on the above. The ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is turned off so as to enter the state (retracted state). However, even if a predetermined time has not elapsed since the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 was operated to the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 was operated to the protruding state, the predetermined upper limit number is reached. When the game ball B (one ball in this example) is received by the second starting port 2004, the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 is moved to the closed state and the ball receiving member 2023 is moved to the retracted state at that time. As a result, the game ball B becomes unacceptable to the second starting port 2004.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball B is accepted in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 is in an advantageous gaming state which is advantageous to the player. A hit determination (first special symbol side or second special symbol side) is performed as to whether or not (for example, "big hit game", "small hit game", "time saving state", etc.) is generated. If a jackpot is won in the hit judgment, the jackpot type is determined based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball. A game privilege (a big hit game or a game state after the big hit game) corresponding to the determined type of big hit (determined big hit type) is given. Similarly, if a small hit is won by hit judgment, the small hit type is determined based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the first special symbol random number or the second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball. Then, the game privilege corresponding to the determined type of small hit (determined small hit type) (small hit game, big hit game executed when V is won in the small hit game, game state after the big hit game) Is to be given.

When the hit determination is performed, the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the hit determination, and then the symbol mode (the symbol mode according to the result) is displayed. By stopping the special symbol with the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol), the player can recognize it. As a result, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is not the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the starting condition for the next hit determination is satisfied, and the main control board 1310 In, if there is a first special symbol that is held in an unexecuted state, it will be digested (executed) from the hit judgment with the highest digestion order.

On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a jackpot symbol, a jackpot game in which a player can win a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. When executing the jackpot game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot game is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the first big winning opening 2005a is opened up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (15 rounds in this embodiment) according to the determined jackpot type (first). A round game is performed (the large winning opening 2005a is made ready to accept the game ball B). One round game is until the first big winning opening 2005a is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (once in this embodiment), and the specified number (1 time) is set in the first big winning opening 2005a during one round game. The maximum number of winning balls: 10 balls in this example is released until the game ball B is won, or until the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) elapses. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is completed, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot game is performed is generated, and when the ending period ends, the jackpot game is terminated. ..

Further, if the stopped special symbol (second special symbol in this example) is a small hit symbol, a small hit game is performed on the main control board 1310 so that the player can obtain a prize. When executing the small hit game, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hit game is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the second major winning opening 2005b is opened (the second major winning opening 2005b is made in a state where the game ball B can be accepted), and the open game has a predetermined number of opening times (book). In the embodiment, it is performed up to once). Until the specified number of game balls B (upper limit number of winnings: 10 balls in this example) wins in the second large winning opening 2005b during one open game, or the specified time (open game time: in this example) It will be released until 1.8 seconds) elapses. In the open game, an open effect is performed. Then, when the open game of the specified number of times is completed, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit game is performed is generated, and when the ending period is completed, the small hit game is finished. Will be done.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the big hit game may be continuously generated after the small hit game is completed. Specifically, on the condition that the game ball B wins the second large winning opening 2005b in the small hit game, and the winning game ball B is distributed to the internal V winning opening 2411 (V winning). A round game in which the first big winning opening 2005a is opened is performed up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (15 rounds in this embodiment) according to the determined small hit type. Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hit game described above, not only the end of the small hit game is indicated, but also whether the game ball B has entered the V winning opening 2411 inside the second big winning opening 2005b. Whether or not, that is, whether or not the big hit game is continuously performed from the small hit game is also indicated. If the big hit game is continuously generated after the small hit game is completed, the small hit game in which the second big winning opening 2005b is opened becomes one round, and the number of round games including this one round. Until the specified number of rounds is reached (from the second round to the 16th round), a round game in which the first prize opening 2005a is opened is performed.

Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, in a part of the case where the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are jackpot symbols, the time is reduced after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, in a part of the case where the second special symbol is a small hit symbol, it is controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game executed when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game. To do. In this time-saving state, the result of the normal judgment as to whether or not to make it easier for the game ball B to win the second starting port 2004 is derived as compared with the non-time-saving state (normal game state, etc.) in which the time-saving state does not occur. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol fluctuation is shortened. Further, in the time saving state, when the normal determination is made, the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 operates in the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 operates in the protruding state in an opening pattern different from the non-time saving state. It has become.

In the present embodiment, when winning in a non-time saving state, the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 opens in a short opening mode (0.08 seconds in this example), and at the same time, receives a ball. While the opening pattern A in which the member 2023 moves forward and backward in a short advance / retreat mode (0.08 seconds in this example) is performed, when the member 2023 wins in a normal drawing in a short time state, the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 is used. At the same time as the opening operation is performed in the long opening mode (2 seconds in this example), the opening pattern B is performed in which the ball receiving member 2023 moves forward and backward in the short advancing / retreating mode (2 seconds in this example). That is, in the second start port 2004, the opening time of the blade member 2022a and the protrusion time of the ball receiving member 2023 corresponding to one hit of the normal drawing are longer in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state, and the player can use the second starting port 2004. It is set to work in an advantageous way. Therefore, in the time saving state, the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 is in the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 is in the protruding state, and the ball entry rate is improved, so that the right-handed strike is performed. When the game ball B is continuously received at the second starting port 2004, the normal symbol variation according to the normal determination is likely to occur.

According to the above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 if the right-handed hit is continued when the player wins the game in a short time. is there. On the other hand, when the player wins the game in a non-time saving state, even if the game ball B enters the inside when the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 is in the open state, the game ball B receives the ball. It takes 0.08 seconds or more to reach the member 2023, and when the ball receiving member 2023 is reached, the ball receiving member 2023 has already changed from the protruding state to the retracted state, and the game ball is reached at the second starting port 2004. B is never accepted. Therefore, in the non-time saving state, the game ball B does not enter the second start port 2004, and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002. To.

Further, the time saving state according to this embodiment ends when the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) after the end of the jackpot game. Similarly, when the game ball B enters the V winning opening 2411 inside the second big winning opening 2005b, except for a part of the case where the small hit symbol is on the second special symbol side, after the big hit game is completed. It ends when the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example).

The specifications of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment are as follows. Eight kinds of numbers [1] to [8] are adopted as decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and [111] [222] [333] are used as jackpot symbols. ] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888] are adopted. In addition, two types of numbers and symbols [7] and [-] are adopted as mini symbols corresponding to the first special symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and [7] is adopted as the jackpot symbol. Has been done. In addition, three types of numbers and symbols [7], [1], and [-] are adopted as mini symbols corresponding to the second special symbol displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and [7] is used as the jackpot symbol. ], [1] is adopted as the small hit symbol. In addition, 1/240 is specified as the winning probability of the jackpot on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side. The winning probability of the small hit on the first special symbol side is defined as 0/240, and the winning probability of the small hit on the second special symbol side is 239/240, respectively. The winning probability per normal figure is specified as 10/10. As for the number of prize balls of the game ball B, three for the first starting port 2002 and one for the second starting port 2004 are used for the first large winning opening 2005a and the second large winning opening 2005b. On the other hand, 15 pieces are specified respectively. Further, as the opening pattern A of the second starting port 2004, the state is maintained until 0.08 seconds have elapsed after the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 operates in the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 operates in the protruding state. The mode to be used is specified. On the other hand, as the opening pattern B of the second starting port 2004, the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 is maintained in the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 is maintained in that state until 2 seconds have elapsed after operating in the protruding state. Is stipulated. Further, "1 ball" is defined as the upper limit number of winnings, which is a condition for the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 to operate in the closed state and the ball receiving member 2023 in the retracted state. Further, in each round game of the big hit game, "1 time" is set as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005a is opened, and "10 balls" is set as the maximum number of winnings. Further, in the small hit game, the number of times the second large winning opening 2005b is opened is defined as "1 time", and the maximum number of winnings is defined as "10 balls".

By the way, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005a is opened as a big hit game. Then, when the game balls B are received in the first prize opening 2005a when the first prize opening 2005a is open, a predetermined number of game balls B are released from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first large winning opening 2005a is in the open state, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (second special symbol in this example) is a small hit symbol, the second big winning opening 2005b is opened as a small hit game. Then, when the game balls B are received by the second large winning opening 2005b when the second large winning opening 2005b is open, a predetermined number of game balls B are released from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , Is paid out to the upper plate 201. However, in the small hit game, the opening time of the second big winning opening 2005b is short, and in the big hit game, the number accepted by the second big winning opening 2005b is larger than the number of the game balls B accepted by the first big winning opening 2005a. Significantly less. In this way, in the small hit game, the number of game balls B paid out to the player is small, but the game ball B that entered the second major winning opening 2005b during the small hit game enters the internal V winning opening 2411. By playing a ball, a big hit game can be generated, and the player can be entertained.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after starting the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. If the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 before these symbols are stopped, the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, so that the special symbol started earlier (first) The start of the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped. The maximum number of reserved memory of the variable display of the first special symbol to be held is four with respect to the first starting port 2002, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002. Also discards the first special symbol without suspending the start of variable display. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the excessive accumulation of reservations is suppressed.

On the other hand, based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started, and then these symbols are stopped. Even if the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is not suspended. That is, the variation display of the second special symbol is started only when the game ball B is accepted at the second start port 2004 in the state where the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stopped. can do. In this way, unlike the first special symbol, even if the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is not suspended, so that even if the time is shortened, it is high. It prevents the frequent start of the variable display of the advantageous second special symbol, which is a small hit with a probability, and suppresses the increase in the burden on the game hall side.

The variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the main effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. In the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then a combination of the LEDs that are lit. Suggests the result of the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination).

Further, in the main effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the result of the hit determination is suggested as the effect image. The production images suggesting the result of the hit determination on the main effect display device 1600 include a decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, a mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and a mini symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. Are displayed respectively. Specifically, when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 in the non-time saving state, each symbol sequence is displayed in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. Is changed, the variable display symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the decorative symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the result of the hit judgment. To. If the result of the hit judgment is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the result of the hit judgment is displayed on the main effect display device 1600. , An advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the result of the lottery hit determination. Further, in both the non-time saving state and the time saving state, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is changed, and the mini corresponding to the result of the hit determination is changed. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol. Further, in both the non-time saving state and the time saving state, when the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the mini symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is changed, and the mini corresponding to the result of the hit determination is changed. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol. In this way, in the non-time saving state, both the decorative symbol and the mini symbol are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first special symbol, but the decorative symbol is displayed larger than the mini symbol. Players are paying attention to the variable display of the decorative pattern. On the other hand, in the time saving state, the decorative symbol that is displayed larger than the mini symbol is not displayed, but the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol and the mini symbol corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. Therefore, the result of the hit determination can be grasped by the player visually recognizing those mini symbols.

[8. Main control board control process]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 104 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment is first subjected to various processes in step S1 on the condition that the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated. Initializes the data stored in the register and the main control built-in RAM. The RAM clear switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU inputs the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined, the initialization process (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is saved in the main control built-in RAM. If the RAM clear switch is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for restoring the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

Next, as the process of step S2, the random number, which is the number to be updated within the predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and the special symbol used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. A reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the main effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variable time) required for the variable display control of the above special symbol. Reach random numbers used in the lottery process to decide whether or not to do so, and symbol random numbers used in the lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the above special random numbers (first symbol random number, It is equipped with a random number counter that holds random numbers such as (second symbol random number), random number (ordinary random number) used for lottery processing related to winning a hit that triggers the opening of the second starting port 2004), and the like.

In this example, the same reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, even when the first starting port 2002 is started and the second starting port 2004 is started and won. Even in the case, it is configured to acquire the reach random number from the same counter that updates the reach random number, but the execution ratio of the reach effect is increased by acquiring from the counters that update the reach random number from different counters. It may be made different, or it corresponds to the first reach judgment table corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol as the reach judgment table to be compared with the acquired reach random numbers, and is different from the first reach judgment table. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be different by providing the second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed so that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) that are not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS.

FIG. 104B is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 104 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 2401, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the first count sensor 2403a, the second count sensor 2403b, and the upper / left middle general prize. Various types such as the mouth sensor 3001a, the lower left general winning opening sensor 3001b, the middle right general winning opening sensor 3001c, the lower right general winning opening sensor 3001d, the magnetic sensor 3003, the V winning opening sensor 4005a, and the outlet sensor 4008. The detection signal from the sensor of is input. Next, as the process of step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol and the normal symbol is stopped are updated and the counter of the random number counter. The operation is performed.

Then, after the random numbers are updated in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process including a lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped as the process of step S14. To execute. The special symbol process processing will be described later, but here, basically, the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is described. The corresponding process will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning a hit that triggers the opening of the second starting port 2004 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is then subjected to the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. The process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as the process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to, for example, the peripheral control board 1510 is performed.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer as the process of step S18.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the first count sensor 2403a, and the second count sensor 2403b as the process of step S19. When the detection signals of the upper left middle general winning opening sensor 3001a, the lower left general winning opening sensor 3001b, the upper right middle general winning opening sensor 3001c, the lower right general winning opening sensor 3001d, etc. are in the ON state, they are used. A prize ball process for outputting a payout control command to the payout control board 633 is executed so that the prize ball corresponding to the signal is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU mounted on the payout control board 633 outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 and pays out the prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 and the first start port sensor 3002 is turned on, "3 balls", and the game ball B wins the second start port 2004 and the first When the second start port sensor 2402 is turned on, "1 ball", when the game ball B wins the first prize opening 2005a and the first count sensor 2403a is turned on, "15 balls", the second prize When the game ball B wins the mouth 2005b and the second count sensor 2403b is turned on, "15 balls", the game ball B wins the upper general winning opening 2001a or the left middle general winning opening 2001b, and the upper and left When the middle general winning opening sensor 3001a is turned on, the game ball B wins in the lower left general winning opening 2001c, and when the lower left general winning opening sensor 3001b is turned on, the middle right general winning opening 2001d When the game ball B wins and the right middle general winning opening sensor 3001c is turned on, and when the game ball B wins the lower right general winning opening 2001e and the lower right general winning opening sensor 3001d is turned on. In that case, the prize balls of "8 balls" are paid out to the players respectively.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 then executes a storage process for checking the increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process, which is a process of outputting a test signal so that the control state of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only the flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process process (step S14).

Assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is first driven by the first start port sensor 3002, as shown in FIG. 105. On condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first start port 2002) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter and this is built in the main control. The first start port passage process such as storing in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S32). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the above random number. A second start port passage process such as acquiring from a counter and storing this in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

Next, the main control MPU determines whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is controlled is set (step S35), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the control of the jackpot game is performed. The jackpot control process (step S40) for performing the above is executed. In the jackpot control process, the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the content of the jackpot type) regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped suggests "15R jackpot". When the first prize opening 2005a is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first prize opening 2005a is filled with 10 game balls B by the first count sensor 2403a. A process of controlling the 15R jackpot game in which the opening / closing pattern of closing when detected is repeated 15 times is executed.

Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such open control of the first big winning opening 2005a, the time saving flag setting process is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit game based on the big hit controlled by the big hit game is finished after the big hit game is finished. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in 116 or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 120 described later. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the time reduction number is set to 100 times, and after the jackpot game is completed, the time reduction control is started and the variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed 100 times. Sometimes the time saving control is terminated.

Further, if the big hit executing flag is not set, the main control MPU determines whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit game is controlled is set (step S36), and the small hit is executed. If the executing flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "small hit", the second big winning opening 2005b, which will be described later, After opening the second major winning opening 2005b based on the opening pattern A or the opening pattern B, or when it is detected by the second count sensor 2403b that 10 game balls B have won in the second major winning opening 2005b. Perform the process of closing. Further, when the game ball B winning in the second big winning opening 2005b enters the V winning opening 2411, the first big winning opening 2005a is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) by controlling the big hit game. After that, when it is detected by the first count sensor 2403a that 10 game balls B have won in the first big winning opening 2005a, the opening / closing pattern is repeated 15 times to shift to the 16R big hit game.

Further, the main control MPU is a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), and the first (Ii) On condition that the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped. A second special symbol process process including the lottery process related to the display mode is executed (step S39).

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S32).

If it is determined that the first start port sensor 3002 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first start port 2002 in the process of step S31, it is shown in FIG. 106. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S41.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires a counter value by the first special hold number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol hold storage area from the main control built-in RAM. Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" (step S42). In the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43 to S43 to newly put the variable display control of the first special symbol into the pending state. The processing of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is a display result of the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variation random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not to make a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed. After executing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information (type of variation pattern) before starting the variation display according to the start winning prize (step S45), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is the maximum value, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S43 to S45, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

Further, when the first reserved storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the first starting port 2002, a command (first reserved number) instructing the first reserved storage number in the above storage process (step S20). The designated commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved number display on the main reserved number indicator 1610 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect pre-determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation Whether or not a big hit is achieved by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as a game effect executed by the main effect display device 1600. The mode type of the game effect to be played is specified (step S61).

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main effect display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be executed, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-determination process relating to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved storage number (first reserved memory number) (I) The value of the special hold number counter) and the first special symbol pre-determination command according to the above are set (step S62).

Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start winning is stored in correspondence with the first start port 2002. In addition to the number of reserved memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated start prize is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the main effect display device 1600 Peripheral control mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 before the advance determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is executed as the game effect to be executed, and the variation display according to the start winning is started. You will be able to grasp the MPU.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing prior determination information regarding the variation display of the first special symbol.

Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved storages, and the peripheral control MPU stores the first (earliest) pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Store in order from the area. Then, when the pre-judgment command is received when the pre-judgment information is stored in the n-th (n = 1-3) storage area, the pre-judgment information notified to the n + 1-th (n = 1-3) storage area is received. Is stored, and when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the received first variation pattern command. The judgment information is discarded and the pre-judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2-4) storage area is moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-judgment information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display occurs can be specified, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is put on hold in this way, the jackpot expectation (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding state). ) Will be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, for example, when the hold display is newly output or when the hold display is shifted according to the hold digestion. ..

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S34).

If it is determined that the second start port sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second start port 2004 in the process of step S33, it is shown in FIG. 108. As described above, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, is the first hold storage number "0"? It is determined whether or not (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is "0", whether or not either the big hit executing flag or the small hit executing flag is set is set. A determination is made (step S53). If it is determined in the process of step S53 that neither the big hit executing flag nor the small hit executing flag is set, the first special symbol process flag and the second special symbol process flag are not set. In each case, it is determined whether or not the special symbol normal processing (first special symbol normal processing, second special symbol normal processing) should be performed (step S54). Then, in the process of step S54, both the first special symbol process flag and the second special symbol process flag should perform the special symbol normal process (first special symbol normal process, second special symbol normal process). If it is determined that the symbols are shown, the following steps S55 to S56 are performed in order to put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a new hold state. That is, first, as the process of step S55, the second special hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S56, each random number acquired in step S51 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in and end the process.

On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the first reserved storage number is not "0", the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is in the pending state, the variation display control of the second special symbol is performed by terminating the process without executing the processes of steps S55 to S56. Do not put it in a new hold state. Further, when it is determined in the process of step S53 that either the big hit executing flag or the small hit executing flag is set, or in the process of step S54, the first special symbol process flag is set. If it is determined that any of the above-mentioned second special symbol process flags does not indicate that the special symbol normal processing (first special symbol normal processing, second special symbol normal processing) should be performed, the above-mentioned second The variable display control of the special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, when the variation display control of the second special symbol cannot be started immediately, such as during the variation display control of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or during the control of the big hit game or the small hit game. By terminating the process without executing the process of steps S55 to S56, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

As described above, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not in the pending state, and the variation display control of the second special symbol is not held. The fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is newly put into a hold state only in the state where can be started immediately, and the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol which is newly held is started immediately. It has become.

Further, when the second hold storage number changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, a command (second hold number) for instructing the second hold storage number in the above storage process (step S20). The designated commands 0 to 1) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for determination. Only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag. As a result of comparison with the first special random number in the hit determination process (step S105) described later, it may not be determined as a small hit. Therefore, the hit determination process executed in the first special symbol process process and the first (Ii) The hit determination process executed in the special symbol process process may be separated from the hit determination process, and each process process in the first special symbol process process may be controlled so as not to execute the process related to the small hit.

1. 1. The first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read first special random number, the first special symbol is subjected to lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. Normal processing (step S80)
2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the process of determining the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )
3. 3. About the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the main effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process (step S82) in which the lottery process and the like are performed.
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S83) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 is stopped.
5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1404. First special symbol stop processing (step S84) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 104).

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 110, first steps S101. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) is stored in the same main control built-in RAM. Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Random numbers (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbol is stopped are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize for the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when a start winning prize occurs when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area, and the first prize is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display control hold of the first special symbol occurs is identifiable and memorized, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). become.

Then, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning a big hit or a small hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the hit determination table shown in FIG. 112 (A) and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special symbol normal processing. It is compared with the read out second special random number (step S114).

As shown in FIG. 112 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM and is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it matches the jackpot determination value indicating that one type of first special random number has won the jackpot, and 239 types of first special random numbers are described above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability; 1/240). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, one type of second special random number is used in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. The above second special random number so as to match the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won and 239 types of second special random numbers different from the jackpot judgment value match the small hit judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won. Are associated with each other (big hit probability; 1/240, small hit probability; 239/240). That is, in the hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it is not judged as a small hit, but it is judged as one of a big hit and a loss. In the hit determination table referred to for comparison, it is always determined to be either a big hit or a small hit.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 uses the hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special read in the second special symbol normal processing. As a result of comparison with the random number), if it is determined to be a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is completed.

Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the fluctuation has won a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is the time reduction state and the reach determination table in the time reduction state, and the non-time reduction table used when the game state is the non-time reduction state. It is equipped with a reach judgment table for the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number is reachable, and is consistent with the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach random numbers are not reachable. Random numbers are associated with each other.

Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state reach. The reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines that the reach is lost as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), the fluctuation is caused. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set, and the process ends (step S121).

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 113, first. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 112 (B) and uses the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

As shown in FIG. 112 (B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination results (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C). It is remembered in. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the jackpot symbol determination table of this example, the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the probability of determining the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are the same. Is set to.

In particular,
1. 1. Closed after the first prize opening 2005a is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2403a that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005a. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 15R jackpot game in which the ball B can enter the first prize opening 2005a (easy), and after the jackpot game is completed, the symbol of the special symbol changes. If the next big hit game does not occur before it is executed 100 times, it can be controlled to the time saving state where the state ends, and it can be notified that the time saving state is controlled after that during the round game of the big hit game. Jackpot A
2. 2. Closed after the first prize opening 2005a is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2403a that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005a. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 15R jackpot game in which the ball B can enter the first prize opening 2005a (easy), and after the jackpot game is completed, the symbol of the special symbol changes. If the next big hit game does not occur before it is executed 100 times, it is controlled to the time saving state where the state ends, and the ending period that occurs after the round game of the big hit game (the big hit after all the round games are finished) A jackpot B that can notify that the time is controlled to a shorter time after that (waiting time until the game ends).
3. 3. Closed after the first prize opening 2005a is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 2403a that 10 game balls B have won in the first prize opening 2005a. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 15 times (15 rounds), the game ball B is controlled to a 15R big hit game in which the ball B can enter the first big winning opening 2005a (easy), and is controlled to a non-time saving state after the big hit game is completed. Jackpot C

In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 24 judgment values are distributed when the jackpot is A, and 6 judgment values are sorted when the jackpot is B, resulting in jackpot C. In some cases, 70 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 24% probability of becoming a big hit A, a 6% probability of becoming a big hit B, and a 70% probability of becoming a big hit C. Similarly, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 24 judgment values are distributed when the jackpot is A, and 6 judgment values are sorted when the jackpot is B, and the jackpot is C. In this case, 70 determination values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 24% probability of becoming a big hit A, a 6% probability of becoming a big hit B, and a 70% probability of becoming a big hit C.

In addition, when a lottery result for a big hit is obtained, the game state after the big hit game is completed is determined according to the type of the big hit. Then, in the jackpot control process (step S40), after controlling the jackpot game, the time saving flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

Specifically, when it is determined that the jackpots of "big hit A" and "big hit B" have been obtained, the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed 100 times after the jackpot game for 15 rounds is executed. When it is determined that the big hit of "Big hit C" has been obtained, the game is controlled to the non-time saving state after the big hit game for 15 rounds is executed. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 30% probability that the time will be shortened after the big hit game ends, and a 70% probability that the big hit game will not be completed. It is controlled to shorten the time. Similarly, if a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 30% probability that the time will be shortened after the big hit game ends, and a 70% chance that the big hit game will end. It is controlled to a non-time saving state.

During the jackpot game, the sub-effect display device 1700 is made to display the effect symbol in a variable manner based on the game ball B entering the lower right general winning opening 2001e, and the jackpot game is performed by the stop symbol of the effect symbol. A notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the time is controlled after the end of. Then, when it is determined that the jackpot of "big hit A" has been obtained, it is notified that during the round game of the jackpot game, the notification effect controls the time saving state after the jackpot game is completed. In addition, when it is determined that the big hit of "Big hit B" has been obtained, during the round game of the big hit game, while notifying that the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game by the notification effect, the big hit game During the ending period (waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the big hit game) that occurs after the round game, the notification effect notifies that the time is reduced after the end of the big hit game. Further, when it is determined that the jackpot of "big hit C" has been obtained, it is only notified that the time saving state is not controlled after the jackpot game is completed by the notification effect during the round game of the jackpot game. That is, when a lottery result of a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 24% probability of notifying that the time is controlled during the round game of the big hit game, and a 6% probability. Notifies that the time is controlled during the ending period that occurs after the round game of the big hit game, and does not notify that the time is controlled during the big hit game with a probability of 70%. Similarly, if a lottery result that is a big hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 24% probability that the game will be controlled to a shorter time during the round game of the big hit game, and 6%. It notifies that the time saving state is controlled during the ending period that occurs after the round game of the big hit game with a probability, and does not notify that the time saving state is controlled during the big hit game with a probability of 70%.

If the jackpot A is determined, the jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, if the jackpot B is determined, the jackpot B symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the jackpot C is determined, the jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol. Decide on the C symbol.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol when the jackpot flag is not set (step S136).

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines any of the above lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, reach loss, loss) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

The peripheral control MPU displays and controls the main effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and fluctuation pattern command. On the main effect display device 1600, the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 is variablely displayed only in the non-time saving state, whereas the non-time saving state and the time saving state are displayed. In either case, the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 and the mini symbol corresponding to the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1406 are displayed in a variable manner. To. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol displayed in the non-time saving state, when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command, the jackpot symbol (left, left, If the middle and right decorative symbols are determined to be the same combination of symbols [0] to [8]) and the reach loss is specified, the lost symbol with reach (the left and right decorative symbols are [0] to [0] to right). If the combination of the same symbols in [8] but different intermediate decoration symbols is determined and the loss is specified, the loss symbols (left, middle, right decoration) without reach are determined. Of the symbols, at least the left and right decorative symbols are a combination of different symbols), and the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect). To do. In addition, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the mini symbol corresponding to the first special symbol displayed in the time saving state, and when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command, the jackpot symbol (The mini symbol is the symbol [7]), and when either the reach loss or the loss is specified, the loss symbol (the symbol whose mini symbol is [-]) is determined, and the fluctuation time specified from the variation pattern command. When the lapse of time (at the end of the game production), the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled. In addition, the peripheral control MPU is a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the mini symbol corresponding to the second special symbol displayed in the time saving state, and when the jackpot is specified from the received determination result notification command, the jackpot symbol (The mini symbol is determined to be the symbol [7]), and when the small hit is specified, it is determined to be the small hit symbol (the mini symbol is the symbol [1]), and even if either reach loss or loss is specified. The lost symbol (the symbol whose mini symbol is [-]) is determined, and the determined stop symbol is displayed and controlled when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 114. If this is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) is selected (step S146), and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, a normal loss (reach effect). In the case of loss), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S147).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the first special symbol display 1404 controls the fluctuation display of the first special symbol for the fluctuation time determined in this way, and the main effect display device 1600 synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the special symbol. Control will be performed.

In addition, a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables of this example are provided for each determination result based on a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each variable random number. Then, the main control MPU includes the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined by acquiring the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number from this table. As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the above special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, 164 types of variable random numbers out of 241 types of variable random numbers are set as judgment values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers are super reach with low jackpot expectation. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that any of the effects is executed, and a judgment value (223 to 240) indicating that 18 types of variable random numbers execute any of the super reach effects with high jackpot expectations. ) Is set. In addition, the super reach effect has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game, the expectation of the player for the big hit game is increased when the super reach effect is executed. It has become.

Further, in the fluctuation pattern table of this example, 10 to 60 seconds is set as the fluctuation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, 2 to 10 seconds is set in the time saving state, and similarly, the second special random number is set. The corresponding fluctuation time is set to 10 to 60 seconds in the non-time saving state and 2 to 10 seconds in the time saving state.

When the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, then, as the process of step S151, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter for which the continuation number of the time reduction state is set is "0". Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time reduction counter (step S152), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous reduction counter is "0" (step S153). .. As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the time saving control is terminated is set (step S154).

If the counter value of the time reduction counter is determined to be "0" in the process of step S151, or if the process of step S153 determines that the time reduction counter is not "0", that time point. The process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process is terminated.

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S83).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 115, first steps S171. As the process of, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 116, first steps S181. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1404 is performed, and the first special on the main effect display device 1600. Stopping the symbol A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

Next, when the time saving end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving end flag (step S184) and resets the time saving flag (step S185). As a result, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times of time reduction in this example), the time reduction control is terminated and the control of the non-time reduction state is started. become.

Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating to start the jackpot game (step S187), and the jackpot game The waiting time until the start (the time for displaying the start of the jackpot game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot in the jackpot count counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The jackpot count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process described later, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", it is determined that the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. Control to end the jackpot game. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the big winning opening pre-opening process (step S91) and the big winning opening opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit count counter becomes "0", and the big winning opening is opened. When the round is completed in the opening processing (step S92), the jackpot counter is subtracted by 1 to become "0", and the process proceeds to the large winning opening post-processing (step S93) to end the jackpot game. Perform control to make it.

Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (big hit A start command, jackpot B start command, jackpot C start command) is set according to the type of jackpot (big hit A, jackpot B, jackpot C). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game according to the type of jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 1700, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

Further, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed is, specifically, when the jackpot game is finished, the jackpot is hit in the jackpot control process (step S40) after the jackpot is opened (step S93). After opening / closing control of the first prize opening 2005a according to the type (for example, after opening the first prize opening 2005a for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after opening the first prize opening 2005a for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), 10 game balls B win a prize in the first prize opening 2005a. This is reset when the opening / closing pattern (opening / closing control that repeats the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected by the first count sensor 2403a) is completed (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot executing flag, the jackpot control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 is prevented. The variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1406 become feasible.

Further, when the jackpot flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the process proceeds to step S194 without executing the processes of steps S187 to S189.

When the processes of steps S186 to S189 are executed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value. (Step S194), this process ends.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second special symbol normal process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

As described above, the second special symbol process process is a program module that is substantially the same as the first special symbol process process, and the random numbers and tables used for judgment are different except for some processes. Only the processing different from the processing executed in the first special symbol process processing will be described.

When the second special symbol process flag indicates that the second special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 117, first steps S101a. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the second special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the second special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the second special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102a. Random numbers related to the display mode of the second special symbol (for example, second special random number, second symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) are read from the same main control built-in RAM. Then, as the process of step S103a, the first special hold number counter is counted down.

The second special symbol reservation storage area has only one storage area (second special symbol reservation storage area a), and a random number extracted according to the occurrence of a start winning prize in the second start port 2004 is used as one of the first. Store in one storage area. Then, when the start condition of the variation display based on the random numbers stored in one storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the one storage area are read out. As described above, in this example, when the game ball B enters the second starting port 2004, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not in the pending state, and the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed. Only in the state where the control can be started immediately, the fluctuation display control of the second special symbol is newly put into the hold state, and the change display control of the second special symbol which is newly held is started immediately. It is a thing. Therefore, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), whereas the second special symbol reserved storage area has one. It only needs to have a storage area (second special symbol reservation storage area a).

Then, as the process of step S105a, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning a big hit or a small hit, is performed based on the second special random number of the second special symbol read out. After that, when the second special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the second special symbol stop symbol setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39) (step S106a), this End the process.

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second special symbol stop symbol setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example does not include a small hit as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, whereas the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped. Since a small hit is included as a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, a small hit is obtained as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. It is also determined whether or not it has become. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the small hit flag is set.

Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set (step S131a), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133a), and when the small hit flag is set, FIG. 112 (step S131a). Fluctuation control of the second special symbol by selecting the small hit symbol determination table shown in C) and comparing the second special symbol random number read by the second special symbol normal processing (not shown) with the selected small hit symbol determination table. A small hit symbol as a stop mode (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is determined (step S134a).

As shown in FIG. 112 (C), symbol random numbers (second symbol random numbers) are associated with each of the small hit symbol determination tables according to the determination results (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C, small hit D). It is remembered in the form of being done. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired second symbol random number.

In particular,
1. 1. After opening the second big winning opening 2005b based on the opening pattern A in which the game ball B accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b can be distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or after the game ball B is opened in the second big winning opening 2005b The small hit game is controlled to close when 10 prizes are detected by the second count sensor 2403b, and the game ball B received by the second large prize opening 2005b during the small hit game is the V winning opening 2411. The first count sensor 2403a indicates that 10 game balls B have won a prize in the first prize opening 2005a after opening the first prize opening 2005a for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). By repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected in, the game ball B is controlled to a big hit game that can enter (easily) enter the first big winning opening 2005a, and after the big hit game is finished, a special symbol symbol is used. If the next big hit game does not occur before the fluctuation is executed 100 times, the state is controlled to the time saving state where the state is terminated, and further, during the round game of the big hit game, it is notified that the time saving state is controlled thereafter. Small hit A
2. 2. After opening the second big winning opening 2005b based on the opening pattern A in which the game ball B accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b can be distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or after the game ball B is opened in the second big winning opening 2005b The small hit game is controlled to close when 10 prizes are detected by the second count sensor 2403b, and the game ball B received by the second large prize opening 2005b during the small hit game is the V winning opening 2411. The first count sensor 2403a indicates that 10 game balls B have won a prize in the first prize opening 2005a after opening the first prize opening 2005a for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). By repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected in, the game ball B is controlled to a big hit game that can enter (easily) enter the first big winning opening 2005a, and after the big hit game is finished, a special symbol symbol is used. If the next big hit game does not occur before the fluctuation is executed 100 times, the state is controlled to a shortened state, and the ending period that occurs after the round game of the big hit game (all round games are completed). (Waiting time until the end of the jackpot game), then jackpot B that can notify that the time is reduced.
3. 3. After opening the second big winning opening 2005b based on the opening pattern A in which the game ball B accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b can be distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or after the game ball B is opened in the second big winning opening 2005b The small hit game is controlled to close when 10 prizes are detected by the second count sensor 2403b, and the game ball B received by the second large prize opening 2005b during the small hit game is the V winning opening 2411. The first count sensor 2403a indicates that 10 game balls B have won a prize in the first prize opening 2005a after opening the first prize opening 2005a for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). By repeating the opening / closing pattern that closes when detected in, the game ball B is controlled to a big hit game that can enter the first big winning opening 2005a (easy), and after the big hit game is finished, it is in a non-time saving state. Small hit C to control
4. After opening the second big winning opening 2005b based on the opening pattern B in which the game ball B accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b cannot be distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or after opening the second big winning opening 2005b or in the second big winning opening 2005b Small hit D that controls the small hit game to close when it is detected by the second count sensor 2403b that 10 prizes have been won.

In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 24 judgment values are distributed when the small hit is A, and 6 judgment values are distributed when the small hit is B. When the hit is C, 69 determination values are distributed, and when the small hit is D, one determination value is distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 24% probability of a small hit A, a 6% probability of a small hit B, and a 69% probability of a small hit. It becomes C, and there is a 1% probability that it becomes a small hit D.

In addition, when a lottery result for a small hit is obtained, the game ball B accepted in the second large winning opening 2005b during the small hit game is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 according to the type of small hit. The game state after the big hit game that occurs is determined. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after the big hit game is controlled based on the fact that the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game. , The time saving flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

Specifically, when it is determined that a small hit of "small hit A" and "small hit B" has been obtained, it occurs when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game. After the big hit game for 15 rounds is executed, the time is controlled until the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is executed 100 times, and when it is judged that the small hit of "small hit C" is obtained, it is small. After the big hit game for 15 rounds generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the hit game is executed, it is controlled to the non-time saving state. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, it is controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game with a probability of 30/99, and a big hit game with a probability of 69/99 It is controlled to a non-time saving state after the end. When it is determined that the small hit of "small hit D" has been obtained, the game ball B is not distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game, so that the big hit game does not occur. ..

When it is determined that a small hit has been obtained, the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game, as in the case of determining that a large hit has been obtained. During execution, the sub-effect display device 1700 is made to display the effect symbol in a variable manner based on the game ball B entering the lower right general winning opening 2001e, and the stop symbol of the effect symbol causes a time saving state after the end of the big hit game. A notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the control is performed. Then, when it is determined that the small hit of "small hit A" has been obtained, it is notified that during the round game of the big hit game, the notification effect controls the time reduction state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, when it is determined that a small hit of "small hit B" has been obtained, the big hit is notified during the round game of the big hit game that the time reduction state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game by the notification effect. During the ending period (waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the big hit game) that occurs after the round game of the game, the notification effect notifies that the time is controlled to be shortened after the end of the big hit game. There is. Further, when it is determined that the small hit of "small hit C" has been obtained, it is only notified that the time saving state is not controlled after the end of the big hit game by the notification effect during the round game of the big hit game. That is, when a lottery result of a small hit is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, it is notified that the time is controlled during the round game of the big hit game with a probability of 24/99, and 6 / With a probability of 99, it is notified that the time is controlled during the ending period that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game, and it is not notified that the time is controlled during the jackpot game with a probability of 69/99.

If the small hit A is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the small hit A symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and if the small hit B is determined, the small hit B symbol is selected as the small hit symbol. When it is determined and the small hit C is determined, the small hit C symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the small hit D is determined, the small hit D symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second variation pattern setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a small hit flag when the big hit flag is not set in the second fluctuation pattern setting process (step S141a) and a small hit flag is set (step S143a). A variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S144a).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S148a), and the determined variation pattern is started by the peripheral control board 1510. The variation pattern command to be notified to is set to start the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1406 (step S149a). Further, the main control MPU sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150a). As a result, the variation display control of the second special symbol is performed by the second special symbol display 1406 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect is produced by the main effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Control will be performed.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second special symbol stop process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit game is started when the big hit flag is not set (step S186a) and when the small hit flag is set (step S190a). The hit start command is set (step S191a), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game (time for displaying the start of the small hit game, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S192a). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is set (step S193a). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of small hit. In step S191a, the small hit start command (small hit A start command, small hit B start command, small hit C start command) according to the type of small hit (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C, small hit D) , Small hit D start command) is set. As a result, the effect of the small hit game according to the type of small hit instructed by the small hit start command is executed by the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

Further, when the small hit game is finished, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed is specifically the small hit middle process (step S401) of the small hit control process (step S41) described later. ) To open / close control of the second big winning opening 2005b according to the type of small hit (for example, after opening the second big winning opening 2005b (for example, 1.8 seconds) or after the second big winning opening 2005b has 10 game balls B It is reset when the opening / closing control (opening / closing control) that closes when the winning is detected by the second count sensor 2403b is completed. By resetting the small hit execution flag, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display 1404 The variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1406 become feasible.

Further, when the small hit flag is not set, that is, when a loss occurs, the process proceeds to step S194a without executing the processes of steps S190a to S193a.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the jackpot control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the jackpot process flag.

1. 1. The peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will shift to the jackpot game based on the fact that the mode when the variable display is stopped is the jackpot symbol. Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S91), which waits until the next round is started.
2. 2. The first big winning opening 2005a is controlled based on the fact that the mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped is a big hit symbol, or the first big winning opening 2005a is started based on the start of the next round. The first count sensor 2403a indicates that 10 game balls B have won a prize in the first prize opening 2005a or after the first prize opening 2005a has been opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). Processing during opening of the large winning opening to close when detected in (step S92)
3. 3. Post-processing after opening the big winning opening, which waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit game ends when all the rounds are finished (step S93).

The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening pre-opening process (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 104). Further, in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the big winning opening (step S92), at the start of the round for controlling the first big winning opening 2005a in the open state, a big hit round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set, and the first big winning is won. At the end of a round that controls the mouth 2005a to be closed, a jackpot round end command is set according to the number of rounds. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are commands transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the main production is the production of the jackpot game according to the number of rounds instructed by the jackpot round start command and the jackpot round end command. It is executed by the display device 1600, the sub-effect display device 1700, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. 1. Small hit start process (step S400) to execute the setting process for starting the small hit game
2. 2. Small hit medium processing (step S401) for monitoring the entry and opening time of the game ball B during the small hit game.

The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 104).

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit start process (step S400).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the start of the small hit game as the process of step S411, and if this interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S412). The process ends without executing the subsequent process. The interval timer is set based on the fact that the small hit flag is set when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is stopped as described above (second special symbol stop processing).

On the other hand, if the interval timer has timed out (YES in step S412), the opening pattern (either opening pattern A or opening pattern B) of the second big winning opening 2005b and the distribution according to the type of small hit. The operation pattern of the member 2400 is set (step S413), and the V winning opening solenoid 2011 is turned on to control the game ball B accepted in the second large winning opening 2005b so that it can be distributed to the V winning opening 2411. (Step S414).

After that, when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hit middle process (step S401) (step S417), this process ends.

Here, the control (main control board 1310) of the rotating body 2410 of the opening / closing member and the distribution member 2400 of the second special winning opening 2005b will be described below with reference to FIG. 124.

The opening / closing member of the second large winning opening 2005b determines an opening pattern according to the type of small hit, and operates so as to be able to take an open state and a closed state in an opening / closing mode according to the determined opening pattern. In the present embodiment, both the opening pattern A and the opening pattern B control the second winning opening 2005b to be in the open state for 1.8 seconds as the opening time of the second winning opening 2005b, but the opening pattern A and the opening are open. In pattern B, the opening start timing of the second big winning opening 2005b after the start of the small hit game is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), in the opening pattern A, the second big winning opening 2005b is controlled to be in the open state when 0.2 seconds have elapsed from the start of the small hit game. When 1.8 seconds have passed, the open second prize opening 2005b is controlled to be closed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), in the open pattern B, when 4.6 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game, the second big winning opening 2005b is controlled to be in the open state, and further 1. When 8 seconds have passed, the open second prize opening 2005b is controlled to be closed.

Further, the rotating body 2410 of the distribution member 2400 has one type of operation mode (operation pattern) regardless of the opening pattern determined according to the type of small hit, and the V winning opening solenoid 2111 is turned on. It operates so that the position where the rotating body 24110 is rotated counterclockwise and the position where the rotating body 24110 is rotated clockwise when the V winning opening solenoid 2111 is turned off can be taken. At this time, at the position where the rotating body 24110 is rotated counterclockwise, one game ball B which has entered the second large winning opening 2005b can be held, whereas at the position where the rotating body 24110 is rotated clockwise, the second large winning prize is won. If the game ball B that has entered the mouth 2005b is not held and is discharged from the discharge port 2412, or if one game ball B is held by the rotating body 2410 that has rotated counterclockwise. After that, the rotating body 2410 rotates clockwise, and one game ball B held by the rotating body 2410 is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. In the present embodiment, the opening pattern of the opening / closing member of the second prize opening 2005b and the operation mode of one type of distribution member 2400 are controlled up to the same time. Further, in the present embodiment, when the upper limit number of game balls B win the second large winning opening 2005b, the opening / closing control is terminated even during the opening / closing control.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the opening pattern A is executed, the rotating body 24110 rotates counterclockwise when the small hit game is started as an operation mode (operation pattern) of the distribution member 2400. As described above, the V winning opening solenoid 2111 is controlled to be in the on state, and the V winning opening solenoid 2111 is controlled to be in the off state so that the rotating body 24110 rotates clockwise when 2 seconds have elapsed. Further, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the opening pattern B is executed, as the operation mode (operation pattern) of the distribution member 2400, the rotating body is started when the small hit game is started as in the execution of the opening pattern A. The V winning opening solenoid 2111 is controlled to be turned on so that the 24110 rotates counterclockwise, and the V winning opening solenoid 2111 is controlled to be turned off so that the rotating body 24110 rotates clockwise when 2 seconds have passed. The V winning opening solenoid 2111 is controlled to be on so that the rotating body 24110 rotates counterclockwise again when 2.5 seconds have passed, and the rotating body 24110 rotates clockwise when 0.2 seconds have passed. The V winning opening solenoid 2111 is controlled to the off state.

Further, during the small hit game, the V winning opening sensors 4005a and b are controlled to either the enabled state or the disabled state. Here, the valid state is a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and is controlled by the big hit game after the end of the small hit game, whereas the invalid state is the state in which the V winning opening 2411 is used. Even if the game ball B is distributed, it is not controlled by the big hit game after the small hit game is completed. In the present embodiment, the period during which the game ball B may be distributed to the V winning opening 2411 is in the valid state, and the period during which the game ball B is not likely to be distributed to the V winning opening 2411, for example, due to fraudulent activity The period during which the game ball B is suspected to have been distributed to the winning opening 2411 is invalid.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the opening pattern A is executed, the second major winning opening 2005b is controlled to the effective state when it is controlled to the open state, and the second major winning opening in the open state is controlled. When 2 seconds have passed since the 2005b was controlled to the closed state, it is controlled to the invalid state. Further, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the opening pattern B is executed, the second major winning opening 2005b is controlled to be in the open state as in the execution of the opening pattern A, and the open state is controlled. The second grand prize opening 2005b is controlled to be in the invalid state when 2 seconds have elapsed after being controlled to the closed state. As a result, when the game ball B that has entered the second major winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the game ball B is always distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the valid state.

As shown in FIG. 124 (A), when the opening pattern A is executed, the V winning opening solenoid 2111 is controlled to be in the ON state during the period in which the second major winning opening 2005b is controlled to be in the open state, and the rotating body 2410 is rotated counterclockwise. It is in a state where one game ball B can be held. However, since it takes about 1 second for the game ball B that has entered the second prize opening 2005b to reach the rotating body 2410, during the period for controlling the second prize opening 2005b to the open state, Only when the game ball B enters the second large winning opening 2005b during the first half period, one game ball B can be held by the rotating body 2410 rotated counterclockwise. On the other hand, when the game ball B enters the second major winning opening 2005b in the latter half of the period, the rotating body 2410 is rotating clockwise when it reaches the rotating body 2410, and the rotating body 2410 causes the game ball B. Cannot be retained. As described above, when the opening pattern A is executed, the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 depending on the timing when the game ball B enters the second large winning opening 2005b. There are cases where is not sorted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the opening pattern B is executed, the V winning opening solenoid 2111 is in the first 0.1 second period of the period for controlling the second special winning opening 2005b to the open state. Is controlled to be on, and one game ball B can be held by the rotating body 2410 rotated counterclockwise. However, if the rotating body 2410 is rotating counterclockwise only for the first 0.1 second period, even if the game ball B enters the second large winning opening 2005b, it will be the same when it reaches the rotating body 2410. The rotating body 2410 is rotating clockwise, and the game ball B cannot be held by the rotating body 2410. As described above, when the opening pattern B is executed, the game ball B is not distributed to the V winning opening 2411 regardless of the timing when the game ball B enters the second major winning opening 2005b.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hit medium processing (step S401).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S421 that the V winning opening solenoid 2011 is in the ON state (the game ball B accepted in the second major winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411), it is the same. As shown in FIG. 125, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation pattern of the distribution member 2400 set in step S413 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the ON state of the V winning port solenoid 2011 (step). S422), the ON-state V winning port solenoid 2011 is controlled to an off state (a state in which the game ball B received by the second major winning opening 2005b is distributed to the discharge port) (step S423).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S421 that the V winning opening solenoid 2011 is in the off state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is set in step S413 as shown in FIG. 125. According to the operation pattern of the distribution member 2400, when it is time to turn on the V winning opening solenoid 2011 (step S424), the off V winning opening solenoid 2011 is controlled to be turned on (step S423).

Next, if it is determined in the process of step S426 that the second special winning opening 2005b is in the open state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is set in step S413 as shown in FIG. 125. According to the opening pattern of the second big winning opening 2005b, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the opening state of the second big winning opening 2005b (step S427), or the game ball B has the maximum number of winnings in the second big winning opening 2005b (step S427). In this example, when 10 prizes are won (step S428), the second major winning opening 2005b in the open state is controlled to the closed state (step S429).

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S426 that the second special winning opening 2005b is in the closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is set in step S413 as shown in FIG. 125. When it is time to open the second prize opening 2005b according to the opening pattern of the second prize opening 2005b (step S430), the closed second prize opening 2005b is controlled to be open (step). S431).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S430 that it is not the timing to open the second special winning opening 2005b, as shown in FIG. 125, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is the first. If it is determined that the end timing of the small hit game has elapsed after the end of the open state of the two major winning openings 2005b, the small hit executing flag is reset (step S433).

At this time, if the game ball B has entered the V winning opening 2411 during the valid state (step S434), after setting the waiting time until the start of the big hit game in the interval timer (step S435), the big hit executing flag And, based on the V winning during the small hit game, the accessory winning flag indicating that the big hit game has been set is set (step S436). The accessory winning flag is used to determine whether the game is a big hit game based on a V prize during the small hit game in the above big hit control process (step S40), or whether the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the game is a big hit game. , When the character winning flag is set, the player is notified as if the second round of the 16R jackpot game executed over 16 rounds is being executed, and the player is notified as if the 16R jackpot game including the small hit game is being executed. You will recognize that the game is being executed.

Although not shown, in step S435, the number of unexecuted rounds out of the number of big hit rounds according to the type of small hit (the number of remaining rounds when the small hit game is one round (for example, the game in the V winning opening 2411) If the small hit A controls the 16R big hit game based on the entry of the ball B, the number of remaining rounds is 15))) is set in the big hit counter indicating the remaining number of rounds. As described above, the jackpot count counter is subtracted by 1 each time a round is executed in the jackpot control process, and when the jackpot count counter becomes "0", the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a specified number of rounds. Is determined to have executed and the jackpot game is terminated.

When the process of step S436 is completed or when it is determined in step S434 that there is no V prize during the valid state, the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hit start process (step S400). At this point (step S437), this process ends.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol process process (step S15).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 126, the above As the process of step S802, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs a gate passage process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S803) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S805) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the process of controlling the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is performed. Ordinary electric accessory opening process to be executed (step S807)

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 104).

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S802).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S801, the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 127. As the process of step S811, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires a counter value by a normal hold number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU. .. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved storages of the normal symbol is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are set to newly put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into the hold state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S813, the ordinary random number and the normal random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S814, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU.

However, in the process of step S811, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the ordinary symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary-figure variation random number are not acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter), the variation display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

The gate portion passing process (step S802) may be performed by another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2401 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines the above. The ordinary random number and the above-mentioned normal random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter and stored in the provisional storage area. After that, the counter value by the normal hold number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the maximum value "4". Do. Then, when it is determined that the hold storage number of the normal symbol is not the maximum value, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition) in order to put the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol into a new hold state. ), Then, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number (the above-mentioned ordinary random number stored in the provisional storage area and the above-mentioned ordinary figure variable random number) are selected from the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. It is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the above-mentioned normal hold number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the hold storage number of the normal symbol is the hold storage number). In the case of the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary symbol fluctuation random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage area, and the variation display control of the acquired ordinary symbol is newly performed. You may decide not to put it on hold.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 128, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the processing of step S821. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol is normally stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU as the process of step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and ordinary random numbers) related to the display mode of the symbol is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the variation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped. Random numbers (ordinary random numbers, random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003 are extracted from the first (first) area. Memorize in order. Then, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area. Is stored, and when the start condition of the variation display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) is stored. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 129 (A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

The normal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 129 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU. Then, in the normal figure hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, the above ordinary random numbers are set so as to match the normal figure hit judgment values indicating that all 10 types of ordinary random numbers have been won per normal number. It is associated. That is, in this example, when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the player always wins the game.

When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S829), A flag per normal symbol is set to indicate that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S830), and the symbol per normal symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the normal symbol is determined to be a normal symbol lost symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, a lottery is performed so that these lottery results (instructing either a normal figure hit or a loss) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the general map judgment result notification command according to each result. After that, as the process of step S835, this process ends when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804).

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, the time saving flag is set in the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 130. If (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time reduction time is selected (step S842), and if the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the non-time reduction time is selected. (Step S843).

Then, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation pattern) to be executed is determined by comparing the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table with the normal symbol fluctuation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S844). ), Set the normal symbol variation pattern command to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol variation in the determined normal symbol variation pattern, and start the variation display of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 (). Step S845).

Further, when the main control MPU determines the normal map fluctuation pattern, the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is set in the normal map fluctuation timer (step S846). As a result, the effect control is performed by the normal symbol display 1402 (variation display of the normal symbol in) for the normal symbol fluctuation time according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

Further, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the non-time saving time of this example, 10 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time. On the other hand, in the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during the time reduction of this example, 2 seconds is set as the normal symbol fluctuation time so that the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than that of the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table during the non-time reduction. Has been done. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

Further, when the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is started, the process shifts to the normal symbol variation process (step S805) as the process of step S847, and when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated, this process is performed. End the process.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol variation processing (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S851 as shown in FIG. 131. The normal map fluctuation timer for which the normal map fluctuation time is set in step S846 is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (step S852), the process proceeds to step S853. That is, in the process of step S853, this process ends when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S806).

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol stop process (step S806).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 132, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S861. The display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined by the normal symbol normal processing on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed, and the normal symbol stop for notifying the derivation display of the stop symbol of the first special symbol is performed. The display command is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S862).

Next, when the above-mentioned normal figure hit flag is set (step S863), the second start port according to the current gaming state is used by using the normal figure hit open pattern table shown in FIG. 129 (B). The opening pattern of 2004 is set (step S864).

Specifically, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, the opening pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second start port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, a lottery result based on a normal random number is obtained, as shown in FIG. 133 (A). In addition, the blade opening solenoid 2404a is turned on and the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 is opened in a short opening mode (0.08 seconds in this example), and at the same time, the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is turned on. The ball receiving member 2023 executes the opening pattern A in which the ball receiving member 2023 advances and retreats in a short advance / retreat mode (0.08 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 has a short opening operation time, and the blade member 2022a is in the open state. It is difficult to put a game ball inside. Further, even if a game ball enters the inside when the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 is in the open state, since the blade member 2022a and the ball receiving member 2023 are separated from each other, the blade member 2022a There is a high probability that the ball receiving member 2023 has changed from the protruding state (advanced state) to the retracted state (backward state) while the game ball flows down the distance to the ball receiving member 2023, and the game ball is second. It is designed so that the ball hardly enters the starting port 2004.

By the way, when the opening pattern A is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, whether or not the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 is determined by opening the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100. The time to do so and the distance from the blade member 2022a to the ball receiving member 2023 are related. That is, when the distance from the blade member 2022a to the ball receiving member 2023 is lengthened and the time for the game ball to flow down is longer than the time for the blade member 2022a to be in the open state, the ball receiving member 2023 is reached. When the game ball arrives, the ball receiving member 2023 is always in the retracted state (retracted state), and the game ball that has entered the inside from the blade member 2022a can be prevented from entering the second starting port 2004. On the other hand, the shorter the distance from the blade member 2022a to the ball receiving member 2023 and the longer the time for the blade member 2022a to be in the open state than the time for the game ball to flow down the distance, the more the ball receiving member 2023 is played. When the ball arrives, the ball receiving member 2023 has a high probability of being in a protruding state (advanced state), and the game ball that has entered the inside from the blade member 2022a has a high probability of entering the second starting port 2004. be able to.

On the other hand, if the time is controlled to be shortened at the start of opening the second starting port 2004, the opening pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004. That is, if the second starting port 2004 is controlled to be in a non-time saving state at the start of opening, a lottery result based on a normal random number is obtained, as shown in FIG. 133 (B). At the same time that the blade opening solenoid 2404a is turned on and the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 is opened in the long opening mode (2 seconds in this example), the ball receiving / retreating solenoid 2404b is turned on to receive the ball. The member 2023 executes the opening pattern B in which the member 2023 advances and retreats in a short advance / retreat mode (2 seconds in this example). As a result, when the opening pattern B is executed as the opening pattern of the second starting port 2004, the game ball enters the inside when the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 is in the open state, and the ball is received. When the member 2023 is in the protruding state, the game ball can enter the second starting port 2004. However, immediately before the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 changes from the open state to the closed state when the blade opening solenoid 2404a is turned off, or during the change from the open state to the closed state, the blade member 2022a is moved inside. Even if the game ball enters, since the blade member 2022a and the ball receiving member 2023 are separated from each other, the ball receiving member 2023 is allowed to flow down the distance from the blade member 2022a to the ball receiving member 2023. Has a high probability of changing from a protruding state (advanced state) to a retracted state (backward state), and the game ball hardly enters the second starting port 2004.

When the opening pattern of the second start port 2004 is set, next, as the process of step S885, a normal figure hit start command indicating that the game per normal figure is started is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set to the normal electric accessory. This process ends when the process is updated so as to shift to the release process (step S866). The normal figure hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the main effect display device 1600 is to produce a normal figure hit game according to the type of the normal figure hit instructed by the normal figure hit start command. , Lamps / LEDs, speakers, etc.

Further, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is updated so that the normal symbol process flag is process-shifted to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S807).

Now, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 is in the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 is in the protruding state, as shown in FIG. 134, the above main control As shown in FIG. 134, the main control MPU of the board 1310 is the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time (opening set in step S865) after starting the open state of the second starting port 2004. When the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the pattern) has elapsed (step S872), the blade member 2022a of the starting port unit 2100 is controlled to the closed state, and the ball receiving member 2023 is controlled to the retracted state (retracted state). At that point (step S873), this process ends.

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 is in the closed state and the ball receiving member 2023 is in the retracted state, as shown in FIG. 134, the above main control When it is time to open the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 and bring the ball receiving member 2023 into the protruding state (step S874), the main control MPU of the substrate 1310 sets the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100. This process ends when the ball receiving member 2023 is controlled to the open state and the ball receiving member 2023 is controlled to the protruding state (advanced state) (step S875).

Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that it is not the timing to open the blade member 2022a of the start port unit 2100 and to bring the ball receiving member 2023 into the protruding state, as shown in FIG. 134, When the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of times the second starting port 2004 is opened in the opening pattern set in step S865), the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is usually opened (step S876). Set the end command per figure (step S877). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the end command for hitting the normal figure is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the end command for hitting the normal figure, the main effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. The production can be finished.

[9. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 135, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU performs the initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS progress flag T is set is started (step S502).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU generates an interrupt every 2 mS elapses and executes a 2 mS steady-state process. In the 2mS steady processing, the processing of counting up the 16mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16mS progress monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, when 16mS has elapsed, 16mS has elapsed Along with setting the flag T, the process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS progress flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS progress flag is set in step S502 (16 mS progress flag T is "1"), after resetting the 16 mS progress flag (step S503), 16 mS steady processing is performed (step S504).

In this 16 mS steady processing, a process of controlling the main effect display device 1600, the sub effect display device 1700, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 mS progress flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS. On the other hand, when the 16 mS progress flag T is not set in step S502 (16 mS progress flag T is “0”), the loop process is performed until the 16 mS progress flag T is set.

FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 mS steady-state processing executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, step S149a of the second variation pattern setting process) is received. Therefore, the control process related to the main effect display device 1600 is executed.

Further, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process related to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to various decorative substrates 184, 273 and the like is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

The processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16mS steady processing is completed within 16mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S601) when 16 mS elapses from the start of the 16 mS steady process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during the execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process is completed, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady-state process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16mS steady processing in the sub-main processing.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. 1. Fluctuation pattern command (first variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the first special symbol, second) for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the above command analysis process. After performing processing to control the main effect display device 1600, LED, speaker, etc. based on the second variation pattern command) that indicates the variation pattern of the special symbol, the above effect process flag is set to a value according to the process during the variation effect. Variable production start processing (step S711) to be changed to
2. 2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the main effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. is measured, and processing is performed to control the main effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker, etc. according to the elapsed time, and a special symbol is performed. The variable effect in-process (step S712) of changing the effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable end process according to the elapse of the variable time according to the variable pattern of (first special symbol, second special symbol).
3. 3. Processing for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of the stop display command instructing to stop the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if there is a loss, the above effect Change the process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process, change it to a value according to the big hit effect process if it is a big hit, and change it to a value according to the small hit effect process if it is a small hit. (Step S713)
4. When the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700 are processed to execute display control during the jackpot game based on the reception of the jackpot start command instructing the start of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game is ended. The jackpot effect process (step S714) of changing the above effect process flag to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process.
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit game, the main effect display device 1600 is processed to execute the display control during the small hit game, and the second big prize is won during the small hit game. If the game ball B accepted in the mouth 2005b is distributed to the V winning mouth 2411, the above-mentioned effect process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit effect start process when the small hit game is finished, and the game ball B is V. If it is not distributed to the winning opening 2411, the small hit effect process (step S715) is changed to a value according to the variable effect start process.

By the above processing, the main symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed by the special symbol display (first special symbol display 1404, second special symbol display 1406). The effect display device 1600 will execute the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini symbol.

FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot effect processing (step S714).

In the jackpot effect processing, one of the following four process processes is selectively executed according to the effect symbol process flag.

1. 1. The effect random number updated in the random number update process (step S606) is acquired, and based on the acquired effect random number, a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped is performed. Step S901)
2. 2. The effect symbol variation pattern determination process (step S902) in which the effect symbol variation mode (variation time) displayed on the sub-effect display device 1700 is determined according to the number of rounds or the ending period of the jackpot game.
3. 3. Effect symbol variation processing (step S903) that waits until the variation display of the effect symbol on the sub-effect display device 1700 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the effect symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped, is displayed on the sub-effect display device 1700. Effect symbol stop processing (step S904) to stop

The effect symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the effect symbol normal process (step S901) should be performed in the process of step S501 (see FIG. 135).

FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect symbol normal processing (step S901).

When the effect symbol process flag indicates that the effect symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 139, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 first performs the process of step S921. It is determined whether or not the effect hit symbol stopped flag is set to indicate that the effect hit symbol has been derived as a display result of the variation display of the effect symbol executed during the jackpot game, and the effect hit symbol stopped flag is determined. If is set, the process of steps S922 to S934 is executed. If the symbol stop flag per effect is not set, this process ends without executing the process of steps S922 to S934. In this way, during the big hit game, when the effect hit symbol is derived as the display result of the variation display of the effect symbol on the sub effect display device 1700, regardless of whether or not the effect hold number counter described later is 0. After that, the variable display of the effect pattern is not performed.

The effect hold number counter is a counter that indicates the number of game balls B that have entered the lower right general winning opening 2001e, and is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Specifically, assuming that the lower right general winning opening sensor 3001d is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball B has entered the lower right general winning opening 2001e, the main control board 1310 The main control MPU transmits a lower right general winning opening winning command indicating that the game ball B has entered the lower right general winning opening 2001e to the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, the MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the counter value by the effect hold number counter from the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the hold storage number of the effect symbol is the maximum value "4" based on this counter value. Judge whether or not it is. Then, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the effect symbol is not the maximum value, the effect hold number counter is counted up (1 addition) in order to put the variation display control of the effect symbol into a new hold state. To do. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved storage number of the effect symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the effect symbol is not newly suspended. In this embodiment, only when the jackpot game is in progress (excluding the ending period), the lower right general winning opening winning command is entered when the game ball B is entered into the lower right general winning opening 2001e. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the variation display control of the effect symbol can be newly put on hold. That is, the variable display control of the above-mentioned effect symbol is not newly put on hold except during the big hit game (excluding the ending period).

Next, as the process of step S922, it is determined whether or not there is variable display control of the effect symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the effect hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the effect symbol in the hold state, the effect hold number counter is counted down (1 subtraction) as the process of step S923. Next, as the process of step S924, the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the big hit game at the time of the big hit B or the big hit C, and during the small hit game at the time of the small hit B or the small hit C. If it is determined that one of the jackpot games is in progress, the effect loss symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped (step S925).

On the other hand, in step S924, it is determined that the game is either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit A or during the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit A. In this case, as the process of step S926, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed is 10th round or later (11th round at the time of small hit). As a result, when it is determined that the number of rounds during the execution of the big hit game is the 1st to 9th rounds (2nd to 10th rounds at the time of the small hit), the above random number update process (step S606) is performed as the process of step S927. ) Is acquired, and the effect hit determination table shown in FIG. 140 (A) is compared with the effect random number extracted in step S927 (step S928).

The effect hit determination table shown in FIG. 140 (A) is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control MPU. Then, in the effect hit determination table referred to for comparison with the effect random number, three types of effect random numbers match the effect hit determination value indicating that the effect was won, and nine types of effect random numbers are the effect loss. The above-mentioned effect random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the effect loss determination value indicating that. That is, in this example, it is either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit A or during the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit A. , When the number of rounds during the big hit game is the 1st to 9th rounds (2nd to 10th rounds at the time of a small hit), the effect pattern changes based on the entry of the game ball B into the lower right general winning opening 2001e. When the display is performed, there is a 1/4 chance of winning the production.

When the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is determined to be an effect hit as a result of comparison between the effect hit determination table and the effect random number extracted in step S927 of the effect symbol normal processing (step S929), the variation The effect hit flag indicating that the player has won the effect per effect is set (step S930), and the effect symbol is determined as the effect pattern when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped (stop symbol of the effect symbol) (step S931). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S929 that the effect is not a hit, the effect loss symbol is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped (step S925).

Further, in the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined in step S926 that the number of rounds during the execution of the big hit game is the 10th round (11th round at the time of the small hit) or later, the fluctuation is caused. An effect hit flag indicating that the effect is won is set (step S930), and the effect symbol is determined as the effect hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped (step S931). In this way, it is either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit A or during the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit A, and the big hit. If the number of rounds during the game is not won by the 9th round (10th round at the time of small hit), the number of rounds during the big hit game is the 10th round (at the time of small hit). In the variation display of the effect symbol started after the 11th round), when determining the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped, it is determined whether or not to hit the effect. Instead, it is forced to decide the design per production.

Further, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is in the jackpot game at the time of jackpot A as the process of step S923, when it is determined in step S922 that there is no variation display control of the effect symbol in the pending state. , During the big hit game that occurs when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit A, and the number of rounds during which the big hit game is being executed is the 10th round. If it is determined that it is after (11th round at the time of a small hit), a production hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per production is set (step S930), and when the fluctuation control of the production symbol is stopped. As the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol), the symbol per effect is determined (step S931). In this way, it is either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit A or during the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit A, and the big hit. If the number of running rounds of the game is not won by the 9th round (10th round at the time of small hit), the number of rounds during the big hit game is the 10th round (at the time of small hit). At the time when the variable display of the effect symbol can be started after the 11th round), even if there is no variable display control of the effect symbol in the pending state, the variable display of the effect symbol is forcibly started. As the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the fluctuation control of the effect symbol is stopped, the symbol per effect is forcibly determined.

Further, in the case where the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is determined in step S922 that there is no variation display control of the effect symbol in the pending state, the jackpot game at the time of jackpot B is processed in step S933. It is either during the big hit game that occurs when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of medium or small hit B, and the ending period that occurs after the round game of the big hit game ( If it is determined that it is the waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the big hit game, a production hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per production is set (step). S930), the pattern per effect is determined as the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped (step S931). In this way, if either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit B or during the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit B, There is no winning in the production by judging whether or not it is a production hit, but the ending period that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game (waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the jackpot game) ), The variation display of the effect symbol is forcibly started, and the pattern per effect is forcibly determined as the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped. If there is a variable display control of the effect symbol in the hold state at the start of the ending period that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game, all the variation display control of the effect symbol in the hold state is performed. Later, the variation display of the effect symbol is forcibly started, and the pattern per effect is forcibly determined as the mode (stop symbol of the effect symbol) when the variation control of the effect symbol is stopped.

Then, after either the effect loss symbol is determined in step S925 or the effect per symbol is determined in step S931, the above-mentioned effect symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the effect symbol variation pattern determination process (step S902). At that point, this process ends.

The peripheral control MPU displays and controls the sub-effect display device 1700 based on the determined effect symbol variation pattern. In the sub-effect display device 1700, only during the execution of the big hit game, the left, right, and middle production symbols are variablely displayed based on the game ball B entering the lower right general winning opening 2001e, and the production symbol is stopped. A notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the symbol is controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game depending on whether or not the symbol is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU has a design per effect (a combination of the same symbols whose left, middle, and right decorative symbols are [0] to [8]) as an mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the effect symbol is stopped. If it is determined to, by controlling the display of the determined stop symbol when the fluctuation time specified from the effect symbol variation pattern elapses, it is notified that the time is reduced after the jackpot game is completed. There is. Further, when the peripheral control MPU is determined to be the effect lost symbol (combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right decorative symbols are not the same) as the mode (stop symbol) when the effect symbol is stopped, the effect symbol changes. By controlling the display of the determined stop symbol when the fluctuation time specified from the pattern elapses, it is not notified that the time reduction state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect symbol variation pattern determination process (step S902). When the effect symbol process flag indicates that the effect symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is shown in FIG. 140 (B) as shown in FIG. 141. Using the effect symbol variation pattern determination table shown, the effect symbol variation pattern according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game or the ending period is determined (step S941), and the variation display of the effect symbol displayed on the sub-effect display device 1700 is started. (Step S942).

Further, when the peripheral control MPU determines the effect symbol variation pattern, the effect variation time corresponding to the determined effect symbol variation pattern is set in the effect variation timer (step S943). As a result, the effect control is performed by the sub-effect display device 1700 (variation display of the effect symbol) for the effect variation time according to the determined effect symbol variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), in the effect symbol variation pattern determination table, the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 as the variation time of the effect symbol in the 1st to 13th rounds of the big hit game (during the small hit game). In the big hit game generated by being played, it is set to 10 seconds (corresponding to the 2nd to 14th rounds), in the 14th round of the big hit game (also equivalent to the 15th round), it is set to 5 seconds, and in the 15th round of the big hit game. The eyes (also equivalent to the 16th round) are set to 2 seconds, and the ending period (waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the big hit game) that occurs after the round game of the big hit game is 0. It is set to 5 seconds. That is, as the number of rounds of the jackpot game progresses, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol becomes shorter, and the fluctuation time of the effect symbol becomes shorter during the subsequent ending period than during the round of the jackpot game. It is set. The effect symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the peripheral control MPU.

Further, when the effect symbol variation display control is started, the effect symbol process flag is updated when the process shifts to the effect symbol variation process (step S903) as the process of step S944. End the process.

FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect symbol variation processing (step S903). When the effect symbol process flag indicates that the effect symbol variation process should be performed, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 first performs the process of step S951 as shown in FIG. 142. The effect variation timer for which the effect variation time is set in step S943 is subtracted by 1. Then, when it is determined that the effect variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time of the effect symbol has elapsed (step S952), the process proceeds to step S953. That is, in the process of step S953, this process ends when the effect symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the effect symbol stop process (step S904).

FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the effect symbol stop processing (step S904).

When the effect symbol process flag indicates that the effect symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 first performs the process of step S961. Display control is performed to display the stop symbol of the effect symbol determined in the normal process of the effect symbol on the sub effect display device 1700.

Then, when the effect per effect flag is set (step S962), as the process of step S963, the effect symbol per stop symbol is set, and the effect symbol process flag is process-shifted to the effect symbol normal process. At the time of updating so as to (step S964), this process ends. The flag for stopping the symbol per effect is reset at the end of the big hit game (may be at the end of the round game of the big hit game).

Further, when the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 is updated in step S962 so that the effect symbol process flag is process-shifted to the initial value of the effect symbol normal processing when the effect hit flag is not set. (Step S964), this process ends.

[10. Fluctuation production during jackpot game]
In the present embodiment, during the execution of the big hit game (including the execution of the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game), the game is played in the lower right general winning opening 2001e. Based on the ball B entering the ball, the sub-effect display device 1700 is made to display the effect symbol in a variable manner, and depending on whether or not the stop symbol of the effect symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect hit symbol, the time is shortened after the jackpot game is completed. A notification effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled is being executed. Specifically, when the big hit A, the big hit B, the small hit A, and the small hit B, which are controlled in a time-saving state after the end of the big hit game, are won, the effect symbol changes until the big hit game ends. By controlling the display of the effect hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping, it is notified that the time is reduced after the end of the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit C and the small hit C, which are controlled in a non-time saving state after the end of the big hit game, are won, the effect is produced as an mode (stop symbol) at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the effect symbol until the end of the big hit game. By controlling the display of only the lost symbol, it is notified that it will be controlled to the non-time saving state after the end of the big hit game.

Further, in the present embodiment, before the start of the big hit game, the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 as an mode (stop symbol) when the fluctuation of the decorative symbol and the mini symbol is stopped based on the big hit or the small hit. Although the display is controlled, it is not notified whether or not the decorative symbol and the stop symbol of the mini symbol are controlled to shorten the time after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game, it is possible to aim the game ball B to enter not only the first big winning opening 2005a opened at the time of the big hit game but also the lower right general winning opening 2001e. Then, during the execution of the jackpot game, attention can be paid to the variable display of the effect symbol on the sub-effect display device 1700, with the expectation that the player will be notified that the time-saving state will be controlled after the end of the jackpot game.

By the way, the first big winning opening 2005a opened at the time of a big hit is arranged below the main effect display device 1600 and the sub effect display device 1700. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot game, when the game ball B is hit on either the right side or the left side of the main effect display device 1600, the game ball B is entered into the first big winning opening 2005a in the open state. Can be made to. On the other hand, the lower right general winning opening 2001e is arranged at the lower right of the sub-effect display device 1700. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit game, it is desirable to hit the game ball B on the right side of the main effect display device 1600 so that the ball can be entered not only in the first big winning opening 2005a but also in the lower right general winning opening 2001e. However, for a player who does not want the sub-effect display device 1700 to display a variable display of the effect symbol, the game ball is left on the left side of the main effect display device 1600 so as not to allow the game ball B to enter the lower right general winning opening 2001e. You just have to type in B.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e during the round game of the big hit game (until the end of 15 rounds at the time of big hit and the end of 16 rounds at the time of small hit). The sub-effect display device 1700 displays the variation of the effect symbol, and when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e during the variation display of the effect symbol, the variation display control of the effect symbol is suspended. In addition, if there is a variable display control in the pending state during the ending period (waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the jackpot game) that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game, the hold is held. The variable display of the effect pattern is performed based on. That is, in the case of the ending period and the time saving state or non-time saving state other than the big hit game, even if the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, the variation display of the effect symbol based on the entry. Is never done. When the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, a predetermined number (for example, eight) of the game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Then, in the case of the ending period and the time saving state, when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, a predetermined payout sound is output from the speaker, whereas it is in the non-time saving state. In this case, even if the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, the predetermined payout sound is not output from the speaker. In this way, at least when the time is shortened, a predetermined payout sound can be output from the speaker so that the player can recognize that it is in an advantageous state.

In the present embodiment, if it is either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit A or during the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit A. , Until the 9th round (10th round at the time of small hit) during the big hit game, there is a 1/4 chance of hitting the production based on the entry of the game ball B into the lower right general winning opening 2001e. It is determined whether or not to win the effect, and when the effect is won, the display of the effect symbol is controlled as a display result of the variation display of the effect symbol. In this way, until the number of rounds during which the big hit game is being executed is the 9th round (10th round at the time of the small hit), the more the game ball B is inserted into the lower right general winning opening 2001e, the more the effect pattern is Since the number of variable display times increases and the probability that the symbol per effect is displayed and controlled as a result of the variable display of the effect symbol increases, the game ball B is expected to enter the lower right general winning opening 2001e. be able to.

Then, either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit A or during the big hit game generated by the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit A, and the execution of the big hit game If the number of middle rounds is not won by the 9th round (10th round at the time of small hit), the number of rounds during the big hit game is the 10th round (11th round at the time of small hit). ) In the variable display of the effect symbol started after that, the display control of the effect per effect symbol is performed as the display result. That is, when the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed is 10th round (11th round at the time of small hit) or later, when the variation display of the effect symbol can be started, there is the variation display control of the effect symbol in the pending state. Is displayed in a variable manner based on the hold, and as a result of the display, the display is forcibly controlled to display the design per effect. On the other hand, when there is no variation display control of the effect symbol in the pending state, the variation display of the effect symbol is forcibly performed, and as a result of the display, the display control of the effect per effect symbol is forcibly performed. For example, before the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed starts the 10th round (11th round at the time of a small hit), the game ball does not enter the lower right general winning opening 2001e, and the effect symbol is changed and displayed. Even if this is not performed, the effect symbol is forcibly displayed in a variable manner, and as a result of the display, the display per effect symbol is forcibly controlled. In this way, regardless of whether or not there is a variable display control of the effect symbol in the pending state and whether or not the game ball has entered the lower right general winning opening 2001e, the variable display of the effect symbol is displayed. As a result, by forcibly controlling the display of the design per effect, even if it is difficult to enter the ball into the lower right general winning opening 2001e or win the effect, the sub-effect display device 1700 can be used. You can pay attention to the variable display of the production pattern of.

It should be noted that during the execution of the jackpot game, after the display of the effect hit symbol is controlled as the display result of the effect symbol variation display, no new effect symbol variation display is performed. For this reason, when the display control of the effect hit symbol is performed as the display result of the effect symbol variation display, the change display control of the effect symbol is suspended, or after the effect hit symbol is displayed and controlled, the big hit game (ending). If the game ball B newly enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e and the fluctuation display control of the effect symbol is suspended before the end of the period), the pending state is changed. Will be maintained. Then, since the effect symbol is not displayed in a variable manner except for the big hit game, the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the big hit game at the next big hit or during the small hit game at the next small hit. During the big hit game that occurs due to being played, the effect symbol will be displayed in a variable manner based on the hold. In this way, even after controlling the display of the effect hit symbol as the display result of the effect symbol variation display, the effect symbol variation display is displayed during the next jackpot game based on the hold for the remaining period of the jackpot game. It can be done, and the game ball B can be expected to enter the lower right general winning opening 2001e.

Further, in the present embodiment, when either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit B or during the big hit game generated by the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit B. Even if a game ball enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, it is not won in the production hit in the judgment of whether or not it is a production hit, and the production loss symbol is displayed as a display result of the variation display of the production symbol. Is displayed and controlled. Then, during the ending period (waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the big hit game) that occurs after the round game of the big hit game, the effect symbol is forcibly changed and displayed as the display result. The design is displayed and controlled per production. In addition, even if the game ball does not enter the lower right general winning opening 2001e and the change display of the effect symbol is not performed before the round game of the jackpot game is completed, the effect symbol is forcibly displayed. A variable display is performed, and as a result of the display, the design per effect is forcibly displayed and controlled. According to this, when the game ball does not enter the lower right general winning opening 2001e, or when the display of the production hit symbol is not controlled as a display result of the variation display of the production symbol during the round game of the big hit game. Even if there is, there is a possibility that the ending period that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game is changed and the display of the effect hit symbol is displayed and controlled as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol. It is possible to draw attention to the variable display of the effect pattern at 1700 with expectation.

In the above, if there is a variable display control of the effect symbol in the pending state at the start of the ending period that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game, the effect loss symbol is displayed as a display result during the ending period. After all the variable display of the effect symbols in the pending state is performed so as to control the display, the variable display of the effect symbols is forcibly performed, and as the display result, the display control of the effect per effect symbol is forcibly performed. Therefore, at the time when the display of the effect hit symbol is forcibly controlled as the display result of the variation display of the effect symbol, there is no variation display control of the effect symbol in the pending state.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is set according to the number of rounds of the big hit game or the ending period, and it becomes shorter as the number of rounds of the big hit game progresses, and from the middle of the round of the big hit game. However, the ending period after that is set to be shorter. That is, at the stage where the number of rounds of the jackpot game is early (1 to 13 rounds in this example), since the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is long, the effect is produced by the game ball entering the lower right general winning opening 2001e. While the fluctuation display control of the symbol is likely to be suspended, at the stage where the number of rounds of the jackpot game is slow (14, 15 rounds in this example), the fluctuation time of the production symbol is short, so the lower right general winning opening It is difficult to suspend the variable display control of the effect symbol due to the entry of the game ball in 2001e. According to this, at the end of the round game of the big hit game, it is possible to minimize the variable display control of the effect symbol in the hold state. Further, as the variation time of the effect symbol, since the ending period is shorter than during the round of the jackpot game, there is a variation display control of the effect symbol that is in the pending state at the end of the round game of the jackpot game. In the case, in the ending period that occurs after that, all the variable display control of the effect symbol in the pending state can be terminated at an early stage. The ending period is 0.5 seconds (ending) as the time during which all the variation display control of the effect symbols in the hold state can be ended when the number of reserved effects symbols is "4", which is the maximum value. (Variation time of the effect symbol according to the period) x 4, and 0.5 seconds as the variation time of the effect symbol performed when the display is forcibly controlled after that (variation of the effect symbol according to the ending period) Time) and a total of 2.5 seconds or more are set.

In addition, when the effect symbol is forcibly changed and displayed so as to control the display of the effect hit symbol as a display result, the fluctuation time of the effect symbol is the same as when the effect symbol is not compulsorily changed and displayed. The fluctuation time of the production symbol is set according to the number of rounds of the game or the ending period. However, as another example, when the variable display of the effect symbol is forcibly performed as described above, the variation time of the effect symbol may be different from that at the time of the non-forced variable display of the effect symbol. In this way, when the variation display is performed at a variation time of the effect symbol different from that at the time of the non-forced variation display of the effect symbol, the sub-effect display device 1700 is used to control the display of the pattern per effect as a display result. It is possible to draw attention to the variable display of the production pattern in.

Further, in the above, if there is no variable display control of the effect symbol in the pending state at the start of the ending period that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game, the display result is produced immediately after the start of the ending period. The variable display of the effect symbol is forcibly performed so as to control the display of the hit symbol. In addition, if there is a variable display control of the effect symbol in the hold state at the start of the ending period, the effect in the hold state is controlled so as to display and control the effect lost symbol as a display result during the ending period. After all the variable display of the symbol is performed, the variable display of the effect symbol is forcibly performed so as to control the display of the symbol per effect as the display result. However, as another example, at a predetermined timing (for example, when 5 seconds have passed) after the start of the ending period, the effect symbol is forcibly displayed in a variable manner so as to control the display of the design per effect as a display result. You may. In this way, when the effect symbol is suddenly changed and displayed at a predetermined timing after the start of the ending period, the sub effect display device 1700 is surprised to pay attention to the change display of the effect symbol. Can be made to.

Further, in the present embodiment, either during the big hit game at the time of the big hit C or during the big hit game generated by the game ball B being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of the small hit C. Even if the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, it is not won in the production hit in the judgment of whether or not it is a production hit, and the production is produced as a display result of the variation display of the production symbol. The display of the lost symbol is controlled. If there is a variable display control of the effect symbol in the pending state at the start of the ending period that occurs after the round game of the jackpot game, the effect loss symbol is displayed and controlled as a display result during the ending period. As shown, all the variable display of the effect symbols in the pending state is performed. Therefore, at the end of the ending period, there is no variable display control of the effect symbol in the hold state.

In this embodiment, the production random number is extracted at the start of the variable display of the production symbol, not at the time when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, and the extracted production random number is used for the production. It is determined whether or not to win the prize. However, as another example, when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, the effect random number is extracted and stored, and at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, the stored effect random number is stored. It may be used to determine whether or not to win the production. In such a case, whether or not to win the production using the stored production random numbers between the time when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e and the start of the variable display of the production symbol. The determination may be made in advance, and an effect (look-ahead effect) suggesting whether or not to win the effect may be executed based on the determination result. For example, in such an effect, if it is suggested that the effect is won, the determination that the effect is won is made with a high probability, and the effect symbol is displayed with a high probability as a display result of the variation display of the effect symbol. Come to control.

Further, in the present embodiment, of the five general winning openings 2001a to 2001e, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed only when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e. However, as another example, when the game ball B enters not only the lower right general winning opening 2001e but also another general winning opening, the effect symbol may be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e and when the game ball B enters the other general winning opening, the production contents such as the variation display of the production pattern are different. You may. According to this, from the lower right general winning opening 2001e and other general winning openings, the general winning opening corresponding to the production content desired by the player is selected, and the game ball B enters the general winning opening. You can shoot like this.

Further, in the present embodiment, when one game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed once, but the variation display of the effect symbol is performed. The conditions may be different. For example, every time two game balls B enter the lower right general winning opening 2001e, a variable display of the effect symbol may be performed once, or one game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e. The variable display of the effect symbol may be performed twice just by making a ball. According to this, it is possible to appropriately adjust the frequency with which the variation display of the effect symbol is performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

Further, in the present embodiment, only during the execution of the jackpot game, the effect symbol is changed and displayed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the lower right general winning opening 2001e, but the time saving state other than the jackpot game is displayed. Even in the non-time saving state, the effect such as the variable display of the effect symbol may be executed based on the game ball B entering the lower right general winning opening 2001e. Further, it is executed when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e during the execution of the big hit game and when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e other than the big hit game. The content of the production may be different. According to this, during the jackpot game and other than the jackpot game, it is the same in that the game ball B is driven into the lower right general winning opening 2001e, but the production contents are different. You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e where a predetermined number (for example, 8) of the game balls B are paid out by entering the game ball B, the effect is produced. The variable display of the design is performed. However, as another example, when the game ball B enters the entry port (for example, the out opening) where the game ball B is not paid out even if the game ball B enters, the effect symbol is changed and displayed. It may be. Further, when the game ball B enters the lower right general winning opening 2001e where a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out when the game ball B enters, and when the game ball B enters, the game ball B In either case, when the game ball B enters the ball entrance where is not paid out, or when the game ball B enters the ball, the effect pattern may be displayed in a variable manner. According to this, even if the game ball B enters the above-mentioned entrance, the game ball B is not paid out, but whether or not it is controlled to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game by the variable display of the effect symbol. Since the privilege of being able to recognize is obtained, the player can be satisfied.

Next, the specifics of the sub-effect display device 1700 executed during the execution of the big hit game (including the execution of the big hit game generated by the game ball being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game). An example of the effect will be described with reference to FIG. 144. When the sub-effect display device 1700 is in the non-time-saving state, for example, a video introducing the pachinko machine 1 or a video related to the production being executed on the main production display 1600 is used for the non-time-saving state. The production display of.

As shown in FIG. 144 (A), in the sub-effect display device 1700, when the game ball B is accepted in the lower right general winning opening 2001e during the execution of the jackpot game (excluding the ending period), the jackpot game is generated. Based on the type of big hit or small hit that caused the hit, each symbol sequence is varied and displayed in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of effect symbols 1701a to 1701c are arranged in the left-right direction. The symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so as to be a combination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to make the symbol per effect. If the big hit A, the big hit B, the small hit A, and the small hit B, which are controlled to shorten the time after the big hit game is finished, are won, until the big hit game (including the ending period) is finished. It is notified that the design per effect is stopped and displayed in a predetermined variable display, and that the time is controlled to be shortened after the big hit game is completed. On the other hand, if the big hit C or the small hit C, which is controlled in a non-shortening state after the end of the big hit game, is won, the production loss symbol is displayed until the big hit game (including the ending period) ends. Only stop display is possible.

Then, when the effect loss symbol is determined as a result of determining whether or not to use the effect per symbol, in the sub-effect display device 1700, three symbol rows are a combination of the effect loss symbols (“714” in this example. ), Each of the effect symbols 1701a to 1701c is stopped and displayed (FIG. 144 (B)). At this point, if the hold storage number of the effect symbols is not "0", that is, if one or more LEDs on the sub-hold number indicator 1710 are lit, a plurality of effect symbols 1701a are based on the hold. Whether or not the fluctuation of the symbol sequence consisting of ~ 1701c is restarted (FIG. 144 (C)), the variable display symbol strings are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the three symbol strings stopped and displayed are the symbols per effect. Each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed so as to have a combination corresponding to the determination result (FIG. 144 (D)). Even when the number of reserved cards in the effect symbol is "0", that is, even when the LED on the sub-held number indicator 1710 is not lit, the number of rounds in which the jackpot game is being executed is the 10th round (small). At the time of the 11th round at the time of hitting or at the ending period (waiting time from the end of all round games to the end of the big hit game) that occurs after the round game of the big hit game, a plurality of sub-effect display devices 1700 There is a case where the variation of the symbol sequence consisting of the effect symbols 1701a to 1701c is forcibly started. In such a case, each of the effect symbols 1701a to 1701c is stopped and displayed so that the three symbol sequences are a combination of symbols per effect (“777” in this example).

On the other hand, when the symbol per effect is determined as a result of deciding whether or not to use the symbol per effect, in the sub-effect display device 1700, three symbol rows are a combination of the symbols per effect (in this example, "777"). The effect symbols 1701a to 1701c are stopped and displayed so as to be (FIG. 144 (E)). At this point, even if the number of reserved symbols in the effect is not "0", that is, even if one or more LEDs in the sub-hold number indicator 1710 are lit, after the symbol per effect is stopped and displayed. During the remaining period of the jackpot game, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of effect symbols 1701a to 1701c is not newly started. In such a case, either during the big hit game at the next big hit or during the big hit game generated by the game ball being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the next small hit. , The variation of the symbol sequence composed of a plurality of effect symbols 1701a to 1701c is started based on the hold.

After the sub-effect display device 1700 is stopped and displayed as a plurality of effect symbols 1701a to 1701c, the sub-effect display device 1700 enters a time saving state after the end of the big hit game, and the next big hit game or the next small Until any of the big hit games generated by the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game at the time of hit is started, the production hit symbol is maintained in the displayed state. ing.

[11. Production example during time saving]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, an advantageous gaming state in favor of the player). A hit determination is made as to whether or not a "big hit" or "small hit") is generated. Then, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display 1404 in the function display unit 1400 are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then blinked. , The combination of the lit LEDs suggests the result of the hit determination, and when the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display 1406 in the function display unit 1400. Is repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the result of the hit determination is suggested by the combination of the lit LEDs.

As shown in FIG. 145 (A), in the main effect display device 1600, when the game ball B is accepted by the first start port 2002 in the non-time saving state, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, In a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, each symbol row is changed, and the variable displayed symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed. Each symbol sequence is stopped and displayed so that the symbol sequence has a combination corresponding to the result of the hit determination. Then, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", each decorative symbol 1601a to 1601c is stopped and displayed so that the three symbol rows are a combination of big hit symbols ("777" in this example), and then the big hit. A game occurs (FIG. 145 (B)).

In addition, the main effect display device 1600 displays the mini symbol 1602 in relation to the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1404, and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1406. The mini symbol 1603 is displayed in relation to the variable display. Specifically, when the game ball B is accepted at the first start port 2002 in both the non-time saving state and the time saving state, the mini symbol 1602 in the main effect display device 1600 is changed, and the result of the hit determination is obtained. The corresponding mini symbol 1602 is stopped and displayed. Similarly, in both the non-time saving state and the time saving state, when the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the mini symbol 1603 in the main effect display device 1600 is changed to correspond to the result of the hit determination. The mini symbol 1603 is stopped and displayed. In this way, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2002 in the non-time saving state, both the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c and the mini symbols 1602 in the main effect display device 1600 are variablely displayed. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 145 (C), a plurality of decorative symbols are displayed on the main effect display device 1600 in relation to the variable display of the first special symbol that caused the occurrence of the time saving state in the first special symbol display 1404. After the jackpot symbol (“777” in this example) is displayed as the stop symbol of 1601a to 1601c, the jackpot symbol is maintained in the displayed state until the time saving state ends. In this way, when the time saving state is entered after the end of the big hit game, the display of the big hit symbols (“777” in this example) of the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c is maintained, so that the time saving state is in progress. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display 1404, and the player can compare the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the execution of the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c based on the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol, which has a high probability of obtaining an unfavorable result.

When the game ball B is accepted by the first starting port 2002 in the time saving state, the mini symbol 1602 is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 in relation to the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404. Is displayed in a variable manner, but during such a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1404, a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1600c in the main effect display device 1600 are slowly narrowed vertically or horizontally. The shaking fluctuation display is performed. However, as another example, when a dot matrix display or the like is used as the main effect display 1600, the brightness of a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1600c is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404. May be changed (repeating strength and weakness). On the other hand, even if the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004 in the case of a time saving state, the main effect display device 1600 is used in relation to the variation display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1406. Only the mini symbol 1603 is displayed in a variable manner, and the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1600c are not displayed in a variable manner.

As described above, in the time saving state, during the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404, the mini symbol 1602 is variablely displayed on the main effect display device 1600, and the main effect display device 1600 is also displayed. A plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1600c are swaying and variablely displayed, but when the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 1404, is stopped and displayed, the main effect display device 1600 is variablely displayed. Along with the stop display of the mini symbol 1602, a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1600c which are also swayed and variedly displayed on the main effect display device 1600 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 145 (D)).

When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c in the main effect display device 1600 are related to the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1406. May be changed and displayed. Then, in the time saving state, during the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404, the main effect display device 1600 is used as a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c to display the jackpot symbols (“777” in this example). While the display is maintained and the second special symbol is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 1406, the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c on the main effect display device 1600 may be variablely displayed. In such a case, in relation to the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1406, the main effect display device 1600 is made to display the small hit symbol as the stop symbol of the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c. Later, when the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 is performed and the display of the jackpot symbols is resumed as a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c on the main effect display device 1600, the plurality of decorations are displayed. There is a possibility that the player may be confused by switching from the small hit symbol to the big hit symbol without displaying the symbols 1601a to 1601c in a variable manner. In order to prevent such a situation, a small hit symbol is displayed on the main effect display device 1600 as a stop symbol of a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c in relation to the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1406. After this, even if the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 is performed, the display of the small hit symbol may be maintained.

Further, if the first reserved storage number is not "0" at the time of entering the time saving state after the end of the big hit game, the main effect display device 1600 is used until at least the first reserved storage number becomes "0" thereafter. The display of the jackpot symbol (“777” in this example) may be maintained as a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c, and after the first reserved storage number becomes “0”, the first start port 2002 When the game ball B is accepted, the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c may be restarted in relation to the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404.

In addition to the above, when the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a in the main effect display device 1600 are related to the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1406. ~ 1601c may be variablely displayed. In such a case, after entering the time saving state, until the first reserved storage number becomes "0", the main effect display device 1600 is set as a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c as a jackpot symbol ("777" in this example. ) Is maintained, and when the game ball B is accepted at the second starting port 2004 after the first reserved memory number becomes “0”, the second special symbol display 1406 is used. (Ii) In connection with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c in the main effect display device 1600 may be restarted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, after the time saving state is entered, at least until the first reserved storage number becomes "0", the jackpot symbols of a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c ("777" in this example). ) Is maintained, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to realize that the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display 1404 immediately after entering the time saving state. It is highly probable that a result that is disadvantageous to the player will be obtained compared to the result of the hit judgment on the second special symbol side. The variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols 1601a to 1601c is executed based on the result of the hit judgment on the first special symbol side. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to being played.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachislot machine or the gaming machine obtained by fusing the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end while the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed. Although not detected is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressure of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be detected. As a result, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different production modes, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is urged. It is possible to perform a wider variety of player-participation-type productions, entertain the players, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 (center pressing operation unit 303a and outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the ascending position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the one that moves to the descending position is used. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the ascending position, the downward movement may be restricted after the pressing operation unit 303 moves slightly downward from the ascending position.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit 200 having the rotation operation unit 302 provided on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 protruding forward is not limited to this, and the rotation operation unit is provided inside the dish unit. In addition to the arrangement, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. This also makes it possible for the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a that communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting cylinder portion 43a is provided in the main body frame 4, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 5a Game area 211c Lower plate ball supply port (opening for balls)
540 Ball launcher 700 1st operation line invalidation member 7000 2nd operation line invalidation member 7000D 2nd operation line invalidation member 1012 Launch passage 1013 Foul ball drop port 1014 Return passage 1310 Main control board 1510 Control board 1600 Main effect display device 1610 Main effect display device 1700 Sub effect display device 1710 Sub hold number display 2001a to e General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting port 2005a First large winning port 2005b Second big winning opening 2400 V winning opening device 2411 V winning opening 2500 Center accessory B Game ball Q Illegal ball L Operation line

Claims (2)

It is a game machine equipped with an upper plate and a lower plate that can store game balls.
The game area where the game ball flows down and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball from a predetermined launch position toward the game area,
A return route in which a game ball that has been launched from the launch position but has not reached the game area has an entrance where the ball can enter, and the game ball that has entered the entrance is returned to the lower plate instead of the upper plate. The lower plate return section that makes up the
A fraud prevention unit that can prevent the wire rod attached to the game ball from being operated from the lower plate side through the return route and the exit of the lower plate return unit.
With
The fraud prevention portion is made of a metal plate material having a cut portion formed by bending, and the metal plate material has a predetermined opening other than the entrance so that the cut portion is located at a predetermined position in the return path. It can be attached from the outside of the lower plate return part via
By arranging the metal plate material in the lower plate return portion so that the wire rod can be cut at the cutting portion when tension is applied to the wire rod located in the return path, the wire rod attached to the game ball can be made. It is possible to prevent the operation from the lower plate side through the return route and the outlet of the lower plate return unit.
Further, the return route has a bent portion before the game ball is returned from the outlet of the lower plate return portion, and the wire rod located in the return route can be bent by the bent portion. A game machine to be. It is a game machine equipped with a predetermined return plate,
The game area where the game ball flows down and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball from a predetermined launch position toward the game area,
A return unit that has an entrance through which game balls that have been launched from the launch position but have not reached the game area can enter, and that constitute a return route for returning the game balls that have entered the entrance to the return plate. When,
A fraud prevention unit that can prevent the wire rod attached to the game ball from being operated from the return plate side through the return route and the exit of the return unit.
With
The fraud prevention portion is made of a metal plate material having a cut portion formed by bending, and the metal plate material has a predetermined opening other than the entrance so that the cut portion is located at a predetermined position in the return path. It can be attached from the outside of the return part via
By arranging the metal plate in the return portion so that the wire can be cut at the cutting portion when tension is applied to the wire located in the return path, the wire attached to the game ball is returned. It is possible to prevent the operation from the return tray side through the route and the exit of the return unit.
Further, the return route has a bent portion until the game ball is returned from the exit of the return portion, and the wire rod located in the return route can be bent by the bent portion.
A game machine characterized by that.